]> code.delx.au - gnu-emacs/blob - doc/misc/cc-mode.texi
Use ‘T *restrict’ proto, not ‘T[restrict]’
[gnu-emacs] / doc / misc / cc-mode.texi
1 \input texinfo
2 @c Notes to self regarding line handling:
3 @c
4 @c Empty lines are often significant before @end directives; avoid them.
5 @c
6 @c Empty lines before and after @example directives are significant in
7 @c info output but not in TeX. Empty lines inside @example directives
8 @c are significant.
9
10 @c Conventions for formatting examples:
11 @c o If the example contains empty lines then put the surrounding empty
12 @c lines inside the @example directives. Put them outside otherwise.
13 @c o Use @group inside the example only if it shows indentation where
14 @c the relation between lines inside is relevant.
15 @c o Format line number columns like this:
16 @c 1: foo
17 @c 2: bar
18 @c ^ one space
19 @c ^^ two columns, right alignment
20 @c o Check line lengths in TeX output; they can typically be no longer
21 @c than 70 chars, 60 if the paragraph is indented.
22
23 @comment TBD: Document the finer details of statement anchoring?
24
25 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
26 @comment %**start of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region)
27 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
28
29
30 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
31 @comment How to make the various output formats:
32 @comment (Thanks to Robert Chassell for supplying this information.)
33 @comment Note that Texinfo 4.7 (or later) is needed.
34 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
35 @ignore
36 In each of the following pairs of commands, the first generates a
37 version with cross references pointing to the GNU Emacs manuals,
38 the second with them pointing to the XEmacs manuals.
39 ## Info output
40 makeinfo cc-mode.texi
41 makeinfo -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
42
43 ## DVI output
44 ## You may need to set up the environment variable TEXINPUTS so
45 ## that tex can find the file texinfo.tex - See the tex
46 ## manpage.
47 texi2dvi cc-mode.texi
48 texi2dvi -t "@set XEMACS " cc-mode.texi
49
50 ## HTML output. (The --no-split parameter is optional)
51 makeinfo --html --no-split cc-mode.texi
52 makeinfo --html --no-split -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
53
54 ## Plain text output
55 makeinfo --fill-column=70 --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
56 --no-headers --output=cc-mode.txt cc-mode.texi
57 makeinfo --fill-column=70 --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
58 --no-headers --output=cc-mode.txt -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
59
60 ## DocBook output
61 makeinfo --docbook --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
62 cc-mode.texi
63 makeinfo --docbook --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
64 -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
65
66 ## XML output
67 makeinfo --xml --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
68 cc-mode.texi
69 makeinfo --xml --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
70 -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
71
72 #### (You must be in the same directory as the viewed file.)
73
74 ## View DVI output
75 xdvi cc-mode.dvi &
76
77 ## View HTML output
78 mozilla cc-mode.html
79 @end ignore
80
81 @comment No overfull hbox marks in the dvi file.
82 @finalout
83
84 @setfilename ../../info/ccmode.info
85 @settitle CC Mode Manual
86 @include docstyle.texi
87 @footnotestyle end
88
89 @c The following four macros generate the filenames and titles of the
90 @c main (X)Emacs manual and the Elisp/Lispref manual. Leave the
91 @c Texinfo variable 'XEMACS' unset to generate a GNU Emacs version, set it
92 @c to generate an XEmacs version, e.g., with
93 @c "makeinfo -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi".
94 @ifset XEMACS
95 @macro emacsman
96 xemacs
97 @end macro
98 @macro emacsmantitle
99 XEmacs User's Manual
100 @end macro
101 @macro lispref
102 lispref
103 @end macro
104 @macro lispreftitle
105 XEmacs Lisp Reference Manual
106 @end macro
107 @end ifset
108
109 @ifclear XEMACS
110 @macro emacsman
111 emacs
112 @end macro
113 @macro emacsmantitle
114 GNU Emacs Manual
115 @end macro
116 @macro lispref
117 elisp
118 @end macro
119 @macro lispreftitle
120 GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual
121 @end macro
122 @end ifclear
123
124
125 @macro ccmode
126 CC Mode
127 @end macro
128
129 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
130 @comment @setchapternewpage odd !! we don't want blank pages !!
131 @comment %**end of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region)
132 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
133
134
135 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
136 @comment
137 @comment Texinfo manual for CC Mode
138 @comment Generated from the original README file by Krishna Padmasola
139 @comment <krishna@earth-gw.njit.edu>
140 @comment
141 @comment Authors:
142 @comment Barry A. Warsaw
143 @comment Martin Stjernholm
144 @comment Alan Mackenzie
145 @comment
146 @comment Maintained by Martin Stjernholm and Alan Mackenzie <bug-cc-mode@gnu.org>
147 @comment
148 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
149
150 @comment Define an index for syntactic symbols.
151 @defindex ss
152
153 @comment Combine key, syntactic symbol and concept indices into one.
154 @syncodeindex ss cp
155 @syncodeindex ky cp
156
157 @copying
158 This manual is for CC Mode in Emacs.
159
160 Copyright @copyright{} 1995--2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
161
162 @quotation
163 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
164 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
165 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
166 Invariant Sections, with the Front-Cover Texts being ``A GNU Manual'',
167 and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of the license
168 is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
169
170 (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have the freedom to copy and
171 modify this GNU manual.''
172 @end quotation
173 @end copying
174
175 @comment Info directory entry for use by install-info. The indentation
176 @comment here is by request from the FSF folks.
177 @dircategory Emacs editing modes
178 @direntry
179 * CC Mode: (ccmode). Emacs mode for editing C, C++, Objective-C,
180 Java, Pike, AWK, and CORBA IDL code.
181 @end direntry
182
183 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
184 @comment TeX title page
185 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
186
187 @titlepage
188 @sp 10
189
190 @center @titlefont{CC Mode 5.32}
191 @sp 2
192 @center A GNU Emacs mode for editing C and C-like languages
193 @sp 2
194 @center Barry A. Warsaw, Martin Stjernholm, Alan Mackenzie
195
196 @page
197 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
198 @insertcopying
199
200 This manual was generated from cc-mode.texi, which is distributed with Emacs,
201 or can be downloaded from @url{http://savannah.gnu.org/projects/emacs/}.
202 @end titlepage
203
204 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
205 @comment The Top node contains the master menu for the Info file.
206 @comment This appears only in the Info file, not the printed manual.
207 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
208
209 @summarycontents
210 @contents
211
212 @node Top, Introduction, (dir), (dir)
213 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
214
215 @ifnottex
216 @top @ccmode{}
217
218 @ccmode{} is a GNU Emacs mode for editing files containing C, C++,
219 Objective-C, Java, CORBA IDL (and the variants PSDL and CIDL), Pike
220 and AWK code. It provides syntax-based indentation, font locking, and
221 has several handy commands and some minor modes to make the editing
222 easier. It does not provide tools to look up and navigate between
223 functions, classes, etc.; there are other packages for that.
224
225 @insertcopying
226 @end ifnottex
227
228 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
229 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
230
231 @menu
232 * Introduction::
233 * Overview::
234 * Getting Started::
235 * Commands::
236 * Font Locking::
237 * Config Basics::
238 * Custom Filling and Breaking::
239 * Custom Auto-newlines::
240 * Clean-ups::
241 * Indentation Engine Basics::
242 * Customizing Indentation::
243 * Custom Macros::
244 * Odds and Ends::
245 * Sample Init File::
246 * Performance Issues::
247 * Limitations and Known Bugs::
248 * FAQ::
249 * Updating CC Mode::
250 * Mailing Lists and Bug Reports::
251 * GNU Free Documentation License::
252 * Command and Function Index::
253 * Variable Index::
254 * Concept and Key Index::
255
256 @detailmenu
257 --- The Detailed Node Listing ---
258
259 Commands
260
261 * Indentation Commands::
262 * Comment Commands::
263 * Movement Commands::
264 * Filling and Breaking::
265 * Minor Modes::
266 * Electric Keys::
267 * Auto-newlines::
268 * Hungry WS Deletion::
269 * Subword Movement::
270 * Other Commands::
271
272 Font Locking
273
274 * Font Locking Preliminaries::
275 * Faces::
276 * Doc Comments::
277 * AWK Mode Font Locking::
278
279 Configuration Basics
280
281 * CC Hooks::
282 * Style Variables::
283 * Styles::
284
285 Styles
286
287 * Built-in Styles::
288 * Choosing a Style::
289 * Adding Styles::
290 * Guessing the Style::
291 * File Styles::
292
293 Customizing Auto-newlines
294
295 * Hanging Braces::
296 * Hanging Colons::
297 * Hanging Semicolons and Commas::
298
299 Hanging Braces
300
301 * Custom Braces::
302
303 Indentation Engine Basics
304
305 * Syntactic Analysis::
306 * Syntactic Symbols::
307 * Indentation Calculation::
308
309 Syntactic Symbols
310
311 * Function Symbols::
312 * Class Symbols::
313 * Conditional Construct Symbols::
314 * Switch Statement Symbols::
315 * Brace List Symbols::
316 * External Scope Symbols::
317 * Paren List Symbols::
318 * Literal Symbols::
319 * Multiline Macro Symbols::
320 * Objective-C Method Symbols::
321 * Java Symbols::
322 * Statement Block Symbols::
323 * K&R Symbols::
324
325 Customizing Indentation
326
327 * c-offsets-alist::
328 * Interactive Customization::
329 * Line-Up Functions::
330 * Custom Line-Up::
331 * Other Indentation::
332
333 Line-Up Functions
334
335 * Brace/Paren Line-Up::
336 * List Line-Up::
337 * Operator Line-Up::
338 * Comment Line-Up::
339 * Misc Line-Up::
340
341 Customizing Macros
342
343 * Macro Backslashes::
344 * Macros with ;::
345
346 @end detailmenu
347 @end menu
348
349 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
350 @node Introduction, Overview, Top, Top
351 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
352 @chapter Introduction
353 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
354
355 @cindex BOCM
356 @cindex history
357 @cindex awk-mode.el
358 @cindex c-mode.el
359 @cindex c++-mode.el
360
361 Welcome to @ccmode{}, a GNU Emacs mode for editing files containing C,
362 C++, Objective-C, Java, CORBA IDL (and the variants CORBA PSDL and
363 CIDL), Pike and AWK code. This incarnation of the mode is descended
364 from @file{c-mode.el} (also called ``Boring Old C Mode'' or BOCM
365 @t{:-)}, @file{c++-mode.el} version 2, which Barry Warsaw had been
366 maintaining since 1992, and @file{awk-mode.el}, a long neglected mode
367 in the (X)Emacs base.
368
369 Late in 1997, Martin Stjernholm joined Barry on the @ccmode{}
370 Maintainers Team, and implemented the Pike support. In 2000 Martin
371 took over as the sole maintainer. In 2001 Alan Mackenzie joined the
372 team, implementing AWK support in version 5.30. @ccmode{} did not
373 originally contain the font lock support for its languages; that
374 was added in version 5.30.
375
376 This manual describes @ccmode{}
377 @comment The following line must appear on its own, so that the
378 version 5.32.
379 @comment Release.py script can update the version number automatically
380
381 @ccmode{} supports the editing of C, C++, Objective-C,
382 Java, CORBA's Interface Definition Language, Pike@footnote{A C-like
383 scripting language with its roots in the LPC language used in some MUD
384 engines. See @uref{http://pike.ida.liu.se/}.} and AWK files. In this
385 way, you can easily set up consistent font locking and coding styles for
386 use in editing all of these languages, although AWK is not yet as
387 uniformly integrated as the other languages.
388
389 @findex c-mode
390 @findex c++-mode
391 @findex objc-mode
392 @findex java-mode
393 @findex idl-mode
394 @findex pike-mode
395 @findex awk-mode
396 Note that the name of this package is ``@ccmode{}'', but there is no top
397 level @code{cc-mode} entry point. All of the variables, commands, and
398 functions in @ccmode{} are prefixed with @code{c-@var{thing}}, and
399 @code{c-mode}, @code{c++-mode}, @code{objc-mode}, @code{java-mode},
400 @code{idl-mode}, @code{pike-mode}, and @code{awk-mode} entry points are
401 provided. This package is intended to be a replacement for
402 @file{c-mode.el}, @file{c++-mode.el} and @file{awk-mode.el}.
403
404 A special word of thanks goes to Krishna Padmasola for his work in
405 converting the original @file{README} file to Texinfo format. I'd
406 also like to thank all the @ccmode{} victims who help enormously
407 during the early beta stages of @ccmode{}'s development.
408
409 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
410 @node Overview, Getting Started, Introduction, Top
411 @comment node-name, next, previous, up@cindex organization of the manual
412 @chapter Overview of the Manual
413 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
414
415 @noindent
416 The manual starts with several introductory chapters (including this
417 one).
418
419 @noindent
420 The next chunk of the manual describes the day to day @emph{use} of
421 @ccmode{} (as contrasted with how to customize it).
422
423 @itemize @bullet
424 @item
425 The chapter ``Commands'' describes in detail how to use (nearly) all
426 of @ccmode{}'s features. There are extensive cross-references from
427 here to the corresponding sections later in the manual which tell you
428 how to customize these features.
429
430 @item
431 ``Font Locking'' describes how ``syntax highlighting'' is applied to
432 your buffers. It is mainly background information and can be skipped
433 over at a first reading.
434 @end itemize
435
436 @noindent
437 The next chunk of the manual describes how to @emph{customize}
438 @ccmode{}. Typically, an overview of a topic is given at the chapter
439 level, then the sections and subsections describe the material in
440 increasing detail.
441
442 @itemize @bullet
443 @item
444 The chapter ``Configuration Basics'' tells you @emph{how} to write
445 customizations: whether in hooks, in styles, in both, or in neither,
446 depending on your needs. It describes the @ccmode{} style system and
447 lists the standard styles that @ccmode{} supplies.
448
449 @item
450 The next few chapters describe in detail how to customize the various
451 features of @ccmode{}.
452
453 @item
454 Finally, there is a sample @file{.emacs} fragment, which might help you
455 in creating your own customization.
456 @end itemize
457
458 @noindent
459 The manual ends with ``this and that'', things that don't fit cleanly
460 into any of the previous chunks.
461
462 @itemize @bullet
463 @item
464 Two chapters discuss the performance of @ccmode{} and known
465 bugs/limitations.
466
467 @item
468 The FAQ contains a list of common problems and questions.
469
470 @item
471 The next two chapters tell you how to get in touch with the @ccmode{}
472 project: whether for updating @ccmode{} or submitting bug reports.
473 @end itemize
474
475 @noindent
476 Finally, there are the customary indices.
477
478 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
479 @node Getting Started, Commands, Overview, Top
480 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
481 @chapter Getting Started
482 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
483
484 If you got this version of @ccmode{} with Emacs or XEmacs, it should
485 work just fine right out of the box. Note however that you might not
486 have the latest @ccmode{} release and might want to upgrade your copy
487 (see below).
488
489 You should probably start by skimming through the entire Commands chapter
490 (@pxref{Commands}) to get an overview of @ccmode{}'s capabilities.
491
492 After trying out some commands, you may dislike some aspects of
493 @ccmode{}'s default configuration. Here is an outline of how to
494 change some of the settings that newcomers to @ccmode{} most often
495 want to change:
496
497 @table @asis
498 @item c-basic-offset
499 This Lisp variable holds an integer, the number of columns @ccmode{}
500 indents nested code. To set this value to 6, customize
501 @code{c-basic-offset} or put this into your @file{.emacs}:
502
503 @example
504 (setq c-basic-offset 6)
505 @end example
506
507 @item The (indentation) style
508 The basic ``shape'' of indentation created by @ccmode{}---by default,
509 this is @code{gnu} style (except for Java and AWK buffers). A list of
510 the available styles and their descriptions can be found in
511 @ref{Built-in Styles}. A complete specification of the @ccmode{}
512 style system, including how to create your own style, can be found in
513 the chapter @ref{Styles}. To set your style to @code{linux}, either
514 customize @code{c-default-style} or put this into your @file{.emacs}:
515
516 @example
517 (setq c-default-style '((java-mode . "java")
518 (awk-mode . "awk")
519 (other . "linux")))
520 @end example
521
522 @item Electric Indentation
523 Normally, when you type ``punctuation'' characters such as @samp{;} or
524 @samp{@{}, @ccmode{} instantly reindents the current line. This can
525 be disconcerting until you get used to it. To disable @dfn{electric
526 indentation} in the current buffer, type @kbd{C-c C-l}. Type the same
527 thing to enable it again. To have electric indentation disabled by
528 default, put the following into your @file{.emacs} file@footnote{There
529 is no ``easy customization'' facility for making this change.}:
530
531 @example
532 (setq-default c-electric-flag nil)
533 @end example
534
535 @noindent
536 Details of this and other similar ``Minor Modes'' appear in the
537 section @ref{Minor Modes}.
538
539 @item Making the @key{RET} key indent the new line
540 The standard Emacs binding for @key{RET} just adds a new line. If you
541 want it to reindent the new line as well, rebind the key. Note that
542 the action of rebinding would fail if the pertinent keymap didn't yet
543 exist---we thus need to delay the action until after @ccmode{} has
544 been loaded. Put the following code into your @file{.emacs}:
545
546 @example
547 (defun my-make-CR-do-indent ()
548 (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-m" 'c-context-line-break))
549 (add-hook 'c-initialization-hook 'my-make-CR-do-indent)
550 @end example
551
552 @noindent
553 This example demonstrates the use of a very powerful @ccmode{} (and
554 Emacs) facility, the hook. The use of @ccmode{}'s hooks is described
555 in @ref{CC Hooks}.
556 @end table
557
558 All these settings should occur in your @file{.emacs} @emph{before}
559 any @ccmode{} buffers get loaded---in particular, before any call of
560 @code{desktop-read}.
561
562 As you get to know the mode better, you may want to make more
563 ambitious changes to your configuration. For this, you should start
564 reading the chapter @ref{Config Basics}.
565
566 If you are upgrading an existing @ccmode{} installation, please see
567 the @file{README} file for installation details. In particular, if
568 you are going to be editing AWK files, @file{README} describes how to
569 configure your (X)Emacs so that @ccmode{} will supersede the obsolete
570 @code{awk-mode.el} which might have been supplied with your (X)Emacs.
571 @ccmode{} might not work with older versions of Emacs or XEmacs. See
572 the @ccmode{} release notes at @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net}
573 for the latest information on Emacs version and package compatibility
574 (@pxref{Updating CC Mode}).
575
576 @deffn Command c-version
577 @findex version (c-)
578 You can find out what version of @ccmode{} you are using by visiting a C
579 file and entering @kbd{M-x c-version RET}. You should see this message in
580 the echo area:
581
582 @example
583 Using CC Mode version 5.XX
584 @end example
585
586 @noindent
587 where @samp{XX} is the minor release number.
588 @end deffn
589
590 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
591 @node Commands, Font Locking, Getting Started, Top
592 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
593 @chapter Commands
594 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
595
596 This chapter specifies all of CC Mode's commands, and thus contains
597 nearly everything you need to know to @emph{use} @ccmode{} (as
598 contrasted with configuring it). @dfn{Commands} here means both
599 control key sequences and @dfn{electric keys}, these being characters
600 such as @samp{;} which, as well as inserting themselves into the
601 buffer, also do other things.
602
603 You might well want to review
604 @ifset XEMACS
605 @ref{Lists,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}},
606 @end ifset
607 @ifclear XEMACS
608 @ref{Moving by Parens,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}},
609 @end ifclear
610 which describes commands for moving around brace and parenthesis
611 structures.
612
613
614 @menu
615 * Indentation Commands::
616 * Comment Commands::
617 * Movement Commands::
618 * Filling and Breaking::
619 * Minor Modes::
620 * Electric Keys::
621 * Auto-newlines::
622 * Hungry WS Deletion::
623 * Subword Movement::
624 * Other Commands::
625 @end menu
626
627 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
628 @node Indentation Commands, Comment Commands, Commands, Commands
629 @comment node-name, next, previous,up
630 @section Indentation Commands
631 @cindex indentation
632 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
633
634 The following commands reindent C constructs. Note that when you
635 change your coding style, either interactively or through some other
636 means, your file does @emph{not} automatically get reindented. You
637 will need to execute one of the following commands to see the effects
638 of your changes.
639
640 @cindex GNU indent program
641 Also, variables like @code{c-hanging-*} and @code{c-cleanup-list}
642 (@pxref{Custom Auto-newlines}) only affect how on-the-fly code is
643 formatted. Changing the ``hanginess'' of a brace and then
644 reindenting, will not move the brace to a different line. For this,
645 you're better off getting an external program like GNU @code{indent},
646 which will rearrange brace location, amongst other things.
647
648 Preprocessor directives are handled as syntactic whitespace from other
649 code, i.e., they can be interspersed anywhere without affecting the
650 indentation of the surrounding code, just like comments.
651
652 The code inside macro definitions is, by default, still analyzed
653 syntactically so that you get relative indentation there just as you'd
654 get if the same code was outside a macro. However, since there is no
655 hint about the syntactic context, i.e., whether the macro expands to an
656 expression, to some statements, or perhaps to whole functions, the
657 syntactic recognition can be wrong. @ccmode{} manages to figure it
658 out correctly most of the time, though.
659
660 Some macros, when invoked, ''have their own semicolon''. To get the
661 next line indented correctly, rather than as a continuation line,
662 @xref{Macros with ;}.
663
664 Reindenting large sections of code can take a long time. When
665 @ccmode{} reindents a region of code, it is essentially equivalent to
666 hitting @key{TAB} on every line of the region.
667
668 These commands indent code:
669
670 @table @asis
671 @item @kbd{@key{TAB}} (@code{c-indent-command})
672 @kindex TAB
673 @findex c-indent-command
674 @findex indent-command (c-)
675 This command indents the current line. That is all you need to know
676 about it for normal use.
677
678 @code{c-indent-command} does different things, depending on the
679 setting of @code{c-syntactic-indentation} (@pxref{Indentation Engine
680 Basics}):
681
682 @itemize @bullet
683 @item
684 When it's non-@code{nil} (which it normally is), the command indents
685 the line according to its syntactic context. With a prefix argument
686 (@kbd{C-u @key{TAB}}), it will re-indent the entire
687 expression@footnote{this is only useful for a line starting with a
688 comment opener or an opening brace, parenthesis, or string quote.}
689 that begins at the line's left margin.
690
691 @item
692 When it's @code{nil}, the command indents the line by an extra
693 @code{c-basic-offset} columns. A prefix argument acts as a
694 multiplier. A bare prefix (@kbd{C-u @key{TAB}}) is equivalent to -1,
695 removing @code{c-basic-offset} columns from the indentation.
696 @end itemize
697
698 The precise behavior is modified by several variables: With
699 @code{c-tab-always-indent}, you can make @key{TAB} insert whitespace
700 in some circumstances---@code{c-insert-tab-function} then defines
701 precisely what sort of ``whitespace'' this will be. Set the standard
702 Emacs variable @code{indent-tabs-mode} to @code{t} if you want real
703 @samp{tab} characters to be used in the indentation, to @code{nil} if
704 you want only spaces. @xref{Just Spaces,,,@emacsman{},
705 @emacsmantitle{}}.
706
707 @defopt c-tab-always-indent
708 @vindex tab-always-indent (c-)
709 @cindex literal
710 This variable modifies how @key{TAB} operates.
711 @itemize @bullet
712 @item
713 When it is @code{t} (the default), @key{TAB} simply indents the
714 current line.
715 @item
716 When it is @code{nil}, @key{TAB} (re)indents the line only if point is
717 to the left of the first non-whitespace character on the line.
718 Otherwise it inserts some whitespace (a tab or an equivalent number of
719 spaces; see below) at point.
720 @item
721 With some other value, the line is reindented. Additionally, if point
722 is within a string or comment, some whitespace is inserted.
723 @end itemize
724 @end defopt
725
726 @defopt c-insert-tab-function
727 @vindex insert-tab-function (c-)
728 @findex tab-to-tab-stop
729 When ``some whitespace'' is inserted as described above, what actually
730 happens is that the function stored in @code{c-insert-tab-function} is
731 called. Normally, this is @code{insert-tab}, which inserts a real tab
732 character or the equivalent number of spaces (depending on
733 @code{indent-tabs-mode}). Some people, however, set
734 @code{c-insert-tab-function} to @code{tab-to-tab-stop} so as to get
735 hard tab stops when indenting.
736 @end defopt
737 @end table
738
739 @noindent
740 The kind of indentation the next five commands do depends on the
741 setting of @code{c-syntactic-indentation} (@pxref{Indentation Engine
742 Basics}):
743 @itemize @bullet
744 @item
745 when it is non-@code{nil} (the default), the commands indent lines
746 according to their syntactic context;
747 @item
748 when it is @code{nil}, they just indent each line the same amount as
749 the previous non-blank line. The commands that indent a region aren't
750 very useful in this case.
751 @end itemize
752
753 @table @asis
754 @item @kbd{C-M-q} (@code{c-indent-exp})
755 @kindex C-M-q
756 @findex c-indent-exp
757 @findex indent-exp (c-)
758 Indents an entire balanced brace or parenthesis expression. Note that
759 point must be on the opening brace or parenthesis of the expression
760 you want to indent.
761
762 @item @kbd{C-c C-q} (@code{c-indent-defun})
763 @kindex C-c C-q
764 @findex c-indent-defun
765 @findex indent-defun (c-)
766 Indents the entire top-level function, class or macro definition
767 encompassing point. It leaves point unchanged. This function can't be
768 used to reindent a nested brace construct, such as a nested class or
769 function, or a Java method. The top-level construct being reindented
770 must be complete, i.e., it must have both a beginning brace and an ending
771 brace.
772
773 @item @kbd{C-M-\} (@code{indent-region})
774 @kindex C-M-\
775 @findex indent-region
776 Indents an arbitrary region of code. This is a standard Emacs command,
777 tailored for C code in a @ccmode{} buffer. Note, of course, that point
778 and mark must delineate the region you want to indent.
779
780 @item @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{c-mark-function})
781 @kindex C-M-h
782 @findex c-mark-function
783 @findex mark-function (c-)
784 While not strictly an indentation command, this is useful for marking
785 the current top-level function or class definition as the current
786 region. As with @code{c-indent-defun}, this command operates on
787 top-level constructs, and can't be used to mark say, a Java method.
788 @end table
789
790 These variables are also useful when indenting code:
791
792 @defopt indent-tabs-mode
793 This is a standard Emacs variable that controls how line indentation
794 is composed. When it's non-@code{nil}, tabs can be used in a line's
795 indentation, otherwise only spaces are used.
796 @end defopt
797
798 @defopt c-progress-interval
799 @vindex progress-interval (c-)
800 When indenting large regions of code, this variable controls how often a
801 progress message is displayed. Set this variable to @code{nil} to
802 inhibit the progress messages, or set it to an integer which is how
803 often (in seconds) progress messages are to be displayed.
804 @end defopt
805
806 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
807 @node Comment Commands, Movement Commands, Indentation Commands, Commands
808 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
809 @section Comment Commands
810 @cindex comments (insertion of)
811 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
812
813 @table @asis
814 @item @kbd{C-c C-c} (@code{comment-region})
815 @kindex C-c C-c
816 @findex comment-region
817 This command comments out the lines that start in the region. With a
818 negative argument, it does the opposite: it deletes the comment
819 delimiters from these lines. @xref{Multi-Line Comments,,, emacs, GNU
820 Emacs Manual}, for fuller details. @code{comment-region} isn't
821 actually part of @ccmode{}; it is given a @ccmode{} binding for
822 convenience.
823
824 @item @kbd{M-;} (@code{comment-dwim} or @code{indent-for-comment} @footnote{The name of this command varies between (X)Emacs versions.})
825 @kindex M-;
826 @findex comment-dwim
827 @findex indent-for-comment
828 Insert a comment at the end of the current line, if none is there
829 already. Then reindent the comment according to @code{comment-column}
830 @ifclear XEMACS
831 (@pxref{Options for Comments,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual})
832 @end ifclear
833 @ifset XEMACS
834 (@pxref{Comments,,, xemacs, XEmacs User's Manual})
835 @end ifset
836 and the variables below. Finally, position the point after the
837 comment starter. @kbd{C-u M-;} kills any comment on the current line,
838 together with any whitespace before it. This is a standard Emacs
839 command, but @ccmode{} enhances it a bit with two variables:
840
841 @defopt c-indent-comment-alist
842 @vindex indent-comment-alist (c-)
843 @vindex comment-column
844 This style variable allows you to vary the column that @kbd{M-;} puts
845 the comment at, depending on what sort of code is on the line, and
846 possibly the indentation of any similar comment on the preceding line.
847 It is an association list that maps different types of lines to
848 actions describing how they should be handled. If a certain line type
849 isn't present on the list then the line is indented to the column
850 specified by @code{comment-column}.
851
852 See the documentation string for a full description of this
853 variable (use @kbd{C-h v c-indent-comment-alist}).
854 @end defopt
855
856 @defopt c-indent-comments-syntactically-p
857 @vindex indent-comments-syntactically-p (c-)
858 Normally, when this style variable is @code{nil}, @kbd{M-;} will
859 indent comment-only lines according to @code{c-indent-comment-alist},
860 just as it does with lines where other code precede the comments.
861 However, if you want it to act just like @key{TAB} for comment-only
862 lines you can get that by setting
863 @code{c-indent-comments-syntactically-p} to non-@code{nil}.
864
865 If @code{c-indent-comments-syntactically-p} is non-@code{nil} then
866 @code{c-indent-comment-alist} won't be consulted at all for comment-only
867 lines.
868 @end defopt
869 @end table
870
871 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
872 @node Movement Commands, Filling and Breaking, Comment Commands, Commands
873 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
874 @section Movement Commands
875 @cindex movement
876 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
877
878 @ccmode{} contains some useful commands for moving around in C code.
879
880 @table @asis
881 @item @kbd{C-M-a} (@code{c-beginning-of-defun})
882 @itemx @kbd{C-M-e} (@code{c-end-of-defun})
883 @findex c-beginning-of-defun
884 @findex c-end-of-defun
885 @vindex c-defun-tactic
886 @vindex defun-tactic (c-)
887
888 Move to the beginning or end of the current or next function. Other
889 constructs (such as a structs or classes) which have a brace block
890 also count as ``functions'' here. To move over several functions, you
891 can give these commands a repeat count.
892
893 The start of a function is at its header. The end of the function is
894 after its closing brace, or after the semicolon of a construct (such
895 as a @code{struct}) which doesn't end at the brace. These two
896 commands try to leave point at the beginning of a line near the actual
897 start or end of the function. This occasionally causes point not to
898 move at all.
899
900 By default, these commands will recognize functions contained within a
901 @dfn{declaration scope} such as a C++ @code{class} or @code{namespace}
902 construct, should the point start inside it. If @ccmode fails to find
903 function beginnings or ends inside the current declaration scope, it
904 will search the enclosing scopes. If you want @ccmode to recognize
905 functions only at the top level@footnote{this was @ccmode{}'s
906 behavior prior to version 5.32.}, set @code{c-defun-tactic} to
907 @code{t}.
908
909 These functions are analogous to the Emacs built-in commands
910 @code{beginning-of-defun} and @code{end-of-defun}, except they
911 eliminate the constraint that the top-level opening brace of the defun
912 must be in column zero. See @ref{Defuns,,,@emacsman{},
913 @emacsmantitle{}}, for more information.
914
915 @item @kbd{C-M-a} (AWK Mode) (@code{c-awk-beginning-of-defun})
916 @itemx @kbd{C-M-e} (AWK Mode) (@code{c-awk-end-of-defun})
917 @kindex C-M-a (AWK Mode)
918 @kindex C-M-e (AWK Mode)
919 @findex c-awk-beginning-of-defun
920 @findex awk-beginning-of-defun (c-)
921 @findex c-awk-end-of-defun
922 @findex awk-end-of-defun (c-)
923 Move to the beginning or end of the current or next AWK defun. These
924 commands can take prefix-arguments, their functionality being entirely
925 equivalent to @code{beginning-of-defun} and @code{end-of-defun}.
926
927 AWK Mode @dfn{defuns} are either pattern/action pairs (either of which
928 might be implicit) or user defined functions. Having the @samp{@{} and
929 @samp{@}} (if there are any) in column zero, as is suggested for some
930 modes, is neither necessary nor helpful in AWK mode.
931
932 @item @kbd{M-a} (@code{c-beginning-of-statement})
933 @itemx @kbd{M-e} (@code{c-end-of-statement})
934 @kindex M-a
935 @kindex M-e
936 @findex c-beginning-of-statement
937 @findex c-end-of-statement
938 @findex beginning-of-statement (c-)
939 @findex end-of-statement (c-)
940 Move to the beginning or end of the innermost C statement. If point
941 is already there, move to the next beginning or end of a statement,
942 even if that means moving into a block. (Use @kbd{C-M-b} or
943 @kbd{C-M-f} to move over a balanced block.) A prefix argument @var{n}
944 means move over @var{n} statements.
945
946 If point is within or next to a comment or a string which spans more
947 than one line, these commands move by sentences instead of statements.
948
949 When called from a program, these functions take three optional
950 arguments: the repetition count, a buffer position limit which is the
951 farthest back to search for the syntactic context, and a flag saying
952 whether to do sentence motion in or near comments and multiline
953 strings.
954
955 @item @kbd{C-c C-u} (@code{c-up-conditional})
956 @kindex C-c C-u
957 @findex c-up-conditional
958 @findex up-conditional (c-)
959 Move back to the containing preprocessor conditional, leaving the mark
960 behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a negative
961 argument, move forward to the end of the containing preprocessor
962 conditional.
963
964 @samp{#elif} is treated like @samp{#else} followed by @samp{#if}, so the
965 function stops at them when going backward, but not when going
966 forward.
967
968 This key sequence is not bound in AWK Mode, which doesn't have
969 preprocessor statements.
970
971 @item @kbd{M-x c-up-conditional-with-else}
972 @findex c-up-conditional-with-else
973 @findex up-conditional-with-else (c-)
974 A variety of @code{c-up-conditional} that also stops at @samp{#else}
975 lines. Normally those lines are ignored.
976
977 @item @kbd{M-x c-down-conditional}
978 @findex c-down-conditional
979 @findex down-conditional (c-)
980 Move forward into the next nested preprocessor conditional, leaving
981 the mark behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a
982 negative argument, move backward into the previous nested preprocessor
983 conditional.
984
985 @samp{#elif} is treated like @samp{#else} followed by @samp{#if}, so the
986 function stops at them when going forward, but not when going backward.
987
988 @item @kbd{M-x c-down-conditional-with-else}
989 @findex c-down-conditional-with-else
990 @findex down-conditional-with-else (c-)
991 A variety of @code{c-down-conditional} that also stops at @samp{#else}
992 lines. Normally those lines are ignored.
993
994 @item @kbd{C-c C-p} (@code{c-backward-conditional})
995 @itemx @kbd{C-c C-n} (@code{c-forward-conditional})
996 @kindex C-c C-p
997 @kindex C-c C-n
998 @findex c-backward-conditional
999 @findex c-forward-conditional
1000 @findex backward-conditional (c-)
1001 @findex forward-conditional (c-)
1002 Move backward or forward across a preprocessor conditional, leaving
1003 the mark behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a
1004 negative argument, move in the opposite direction.
1005
1006 These key sequences are not bound in AWK Mode, which doesn't have
1007 preprocessor statements.
1008
1009 @item @kbd{M-x c-backward-into-nomenclature}
1010 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-forward-into-nomenclature}
1011 @findex c-backward-into-nomenclature
1012 @findex c-forward-into-nomenclature
1013 @findex backward-into-nomenclature (c-)
1014 @findex forward-into-nomenclature (c-)
1015 A popular programming style, especially for object-oriented languages
1016 such as C++ is to write symbols in a mixed case format, where the
1017 first letter of each word is capitalized, and not separated by
1018 underscores. E.g., @samp{SymbolsWithMixedCaseAndNoUnderlines}.
1019
1020 These commands move backward or forward to the beginning of the next
1021 capitalized word. With prefix argument @var{n}, move @var{n} times.
1022 If @var{n} is negative, move in the opposite direction.
1023
1024 Note that these two commands have been superseded by
1025 @code{subword-mode}, which you should use instead. @xref{Subword
1026 Movement}. They might be removed from a future release of @ccmode{}.
1027 @end table
1028
1029 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1030 @node Filling and Breaking, Minor Modes, Movement Commands, Commands
1031 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1032 @section Filling and Line Breaking Commands
1033 @cindex text filling
1034 @cindex line breaking
1035 @cindex comment handling
1036 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1037
1038 Since there's a lot of normal text in comments and string literals,
1039 @ccmode{} provides features to edit these like in text mode. The goal
1040 is to do it seamlessly, i.e., you can use auto fill mode, sentence and
1041 paragraph movement, paragraph filling, adaptive filling etc.@: wherever
1042 there's a piece of normal text without having to think much about it.
1043 @ccmode{} keeps the indentation, fixes suitable comment line prefixes,
1044 and so on.
1045
1046 You can configure the exact way comments get filled and broken, and
1047 where Emacs does auto-filling (see @pxref{Custom Filling and
1048 Breaking}). Typically, the style system (@pxref{Styles}) will have
1049 set this up for you, so you probably won't have to bother.
1050
1051 @findex auto-fill-mode
1052 @cindex Auto Fill mode
1053 @cindex paragraph filling
1054 Line breaks are by default handled (almost) the same regardless of
1055 whether they are made by auto fill mode (@pxref{Auto
1056 Fill,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}), by paragraph filling (e.g., with
1057 @kbd{M-q}), or explicitly with @kbd{M-j} or similar methods. In
1058 string literals, the new line gets the same indentation as the
1059 previous nonempty line.@footnote{You can change this default by
1060 setting the @code{string} syntactic symbol (@pxref{Syntactic Symbols}
1061 and @pxref{Customizing Indentation})}.
1062
1063 @table @asis
1064 @item @kbd{M-q} (@code{c-fill-paragraph})
1065 @kindex M-q
1066 @findex c-fill-paragraph
1067 @findex fill-paragraph (c-)
1068 @cindex Javadoc markup
1069 @cindex Pike autodoc markup
1070 This command fills multiline string literals and both block
1071 and line style comments. In Java buffers, the Javadoc markup words
1072 are recognized as paragraph starters. The line oriented Pike autodoc
1073 markup words are recognized in the same way in Pike mode.
1074
1075 The formatting of the starters (@code{/*}) and enders (@code{*/}) of
1076 block comments are kept as they were before the filling. I.e., if
1077 either the starter or ender were on a line of its own, then it stays
1078 on its own line; conversely, if the delimiter has comment text on its
1079 line, it keeps at least one word of that text with it on the line.
1080
1081 This command is the replacement for @code{fill-paragraph} in @ccmode{}
1082 buffers.
1083
1084 @item @kbd{M-j} (@code{c-indent-new-comment-line})
1085 @kindex M-j
1086 @findex c-indent-new-comment-line
1087 @findex indent-new-comment-line (c-)
1088 This breaks the current line at point and indents the new line. If
1089 point was in a comment, the new line gets the proper comment line
1090 prefix. If point was inside a macro, a backslash is inserted before
1091 the line break. It is the replacement for
1092 @code{indent-new-comment-line}.
1093
1094 @item @kbd{M-x c-context-line-break}
1095 @findex c-context-line-break
1096 @findex context-line-break (c-)
1097 Insert a line break suitable to the context: If the point is inside a
1098 comment, the new line gets the suitable indentation and comment line
1099 prefix like @code{c-indent-new-comment-line}. In normal code it's
1100 indented like @code{newline-and-indent} would do. In macros it acts
1101 like @code{newline-and-indent} but additionally inserts and optionally
1102 aligns the line ending backslash so that the macro remains unbroken.
1103 @xref{Custom Macros}, for details about the backslash alignment. In a
1104 string, a backslash is inserted only if the string is within a
1105 macro@footnote{In GCC, unescaped line breaks within strings are
1106 valid.}.
1107
1108 This function is not bound to a key by default, but it's intended to be
1109 used on the @kbd{RET} key. If you like the behavior of
1110 @code{newline-and-indent} on @kbd{RET}, you should consider switching to
1111 this function. @xref{Sample Init File}.
1112
1113 @item @kbd{M-x c-context-open-line}
1114 @findex c-context-open-line
1115 @findex context-open-line (c-)
1116 This is to @kbd{C-o} (@kbd{M-x open-line}) as
1117 @code{c-context-line-break} is to @kbd{RET}. I.e., it works just like
1118 @code{c-context-line-break} but leaves the point before the inserted
1119 line break.
1120 @end table
1121
1122
1123 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1124 @node Minor Modes, Electric Keys, Filling and Breaking, Commands
1125 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1126 @section Minor Modes
1127 @cindex Minor Modes
1128 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1129
1130 @ccmode{} contains several minor-mode-like features that you might
1131 find useful while writing new code or editing old code:
1132
1133 @table @asis
1134 @item electric mode
1135 When this is enabled, certain visible characters cause reformatting as
1136 they are typed. This is normally helpful, but can be a nuisance when
1137 editing chaotically formatted code. It can also be disconcerting,
1138 especially for users who are new to @ccmode{}.
1139 @item auto-newline mode
1140 This automatically inserts newlines where you'd probably want to type
1141 them yourself, e.g., after typing @samp{@}}s. Its action is suppressed
1142 when electric mode is disabled.
1143 @item hungry-delete mode
1144 This lets you delete a contiguous block of whitespace with a single
1145 key: for example, the newline and indentation just inserted by
1146 auto-newline when you want to back up and write a comment after the
1147 last statement.
1148 @item subword mode
1149 This mode makes basic word movement commands like @kbd{M-f}
1150 (@code{forward-word}) and @kbd{M-b} (@code{backward-word}) treat the
1151 parts of sillycapsed symbols as different words.
1152 E.g., @samp{NSGraphicsContext} is treated as three words @samp{NS},
1153 @samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context}.
1154 @item syntactic-indentation mode
1155 When this is enabled (which it normally is), indentation commands such
1156 as @kbd{C-j} indent lines of code according to their syntactic
1157 structure. Otherwise, a line is simply indented to the same level as
1158 the previous one and @kbd{@key{TAB}} adjusts the indentation in steps
1159 of @code{c-basic-offset}.
1160 @end table
1161
1162 Full details on how these minor modes work are at @ref{Electric Keys},
1163 @ref{Auto-newlines}, @ref{Hungry WS Deletion}, @ref{Subword Movement},
1164 and @ref{Indentation Engine Basics}.
1165
1166 You can toggle each of these minor modes on and off, and you can
1167 configure @ccmode{} so that it starts up with your favorite
1168 combination of them (@pxref{Sample Init File}). By default, when
1169 you initialize a buffer, electric mode and syntactic-indentation mode
1170 are enabled but the other three modes are disabled.
1171
1172 @ccmode{} displays the current state of the first four of these minor
1173 modes on the modeline by appending letters to the major mode's name,
1174 one letter for each enabled minor mode: @samp{l} for electric mode,
1175 @samp{a} for auto-newline mode, @samp{h} for hungry delete mode, and
1176 @samp{w} for subword mode. If all these modes were enabled, you'd see
1177 @samp{C/lahw}@footnote{The @samp{C} would be replaced with the name of
1178 the language in question for the other languages @ccmode{} supports.}.
1179
1180 Here are the commands to toggle these modes:
1181
1182 @table @asis
1183 @item @kbd{C-c C-l} (@code{c-toggle-electric-state})
1184 @kindex C-c C-l
1185 @findex c-toggle-electric-state
1186 @findex toggle-electric-state (c-)
1187 Toggle electric minor mode. When the command turns the mode off, it
1188 also suppresses auto-newline mode.
1189
1190 @item @kbd{C-c C-a} (@code{c-toggle-auto-newline})
1191 @kindex C-c C-a
1192 @findex c-toggle-auto-newline
1193 @findex toggle-auto-newline (c-)
1194 Toggle auto-newline minor mode. When the command turns the mode on,
1195 it also enables electric minor mode.
1196
1197 @item @kbd{M-x c-toggle-hungry-state}@footnote{Prior to @ccmode{} 5.31, this command was bound to @kbd{C-c C-d}.}
1198 @findex c-toggle-hungry-state
1199 @findex toggle-hungry-state (c-)
1200 Toggle hungry-delete minor mode.
1201
1202 @item @kbd{M-x c-toggle-auto-hungry-state}@footnote{Prior to @ccmode{} 5.31, this command was bound to @kbd{C-c C-t}.}
1203 @findex c-toggle-auto-hungry-state
1204 @findex toggle-auto-hungry-state (c-)
1205 Toggle both auto-newline and hungry delete minor modes.
1206
1207 @item @kbd{C-c C-w} (@code{M-x subword-mode})
1208 @kindex C-c C-w
1209 @findex subword-mode
1210 Toggle subword mode.
1211
1212 @item @kbd{M-x c-toggle-syntactic-indentation}
1213 @findex c-toggle-syntactic-indentation
1214 @findex toggle-syntactic-indentation (c-)
1215 Toggle syntactic-indentation mode.
1216 @end table
1217
1218 Common to all the toggle functions above is that if they are called
1219 programmatically, they take an optional numerical argument. A
1220 positive value will turn on the minor mode (or both of them in the
1221 case of @code{c-toggle-auto-hungry-state}) and a negative value will
1222 turn it (or them) off.
1223
1224
1225 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1226 @node Electric Keys, Auto-newlines, Minor Modes, Commands
1227 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1228 @section Electric Keys and Keywords
1229 @cindex electric characters
1230 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1231
1232 Most punctuation keys provide @dfn{electric} behavior: as well as
1233 inserting themselves they perform some other action, such as
1234 reindenting the line. This reindentation saves you from having to
1235 reindent a line manually after typing, say, a @samp{@}}. A few
1236 keywords, such as @code{else}, also trigger electric action.
1237
1238 You can inhibit the electric behavior described here by disabling
1239 electric minor mode (@pxref{Minor Modes}).
1240
1241 Common to all these keys is that they only behave electrically when
1242 used in normal code (as contrasted with getting typed in a string
1243 literal or comment). Those which cause re-indentation do so only when
1244 @code{c-syntactic-indentation} has a non-@code{nil} value (which it
1245 does by default).
1246
1247 These keys and keywords are:
1248 @c ACM, 2004/8/24: c-electric-pound doesn't check c-s-i: this is more
1249 @c like a bug in the code than a bug in this document. It'll get
1250 @c fixed in the code sometime.
1251
1252 @table @kbd
1253 @item #
1254 @kindex #
1255 @findex c-electric-pound
1256 @findex electric-pound (c-)
1257 @vindex c-electric-pound-behavior
1258 @vindex electric-pound-behavior (c-)
1259 Pound (bound to @code{c-electric-pound}) is electric when typed as the
1260 first non-whitespace character on a line and not within a macro
1261 definition. In this case, the variable @code{c-electric-pound-behavior}
1262 is consulted for the electric behavior. This variable takes a list
1263 value, although the only element currently defined is @code{alignleft},
1264 which tells this command to force the @samp{#} character into column
1265 zero. This is useful for entering preprocessor macro definitions.
1266
1267 Pound is not electric in AWK buffers, where @samp{#} starts a comment,
1268 and is bound to @code{self-insert-command} like any typical printable
1269 character.
1270 @c ACM, 2004/8/24: Change this (and the code) to do AWK comment
1271 @c reindentation.
1272
1273 @item *
1274 @kindex *
1275 @itemx /
1276 @kindex /
1277 @findex c-electric-star
1278 @findex electric-star (c-)
1279 @findex c-electric-slash
1280 @findex electric-slash (c-)
1281 A star (bound to @code{c-electric-star}) or a slash
1282 (@code{c-electric-slash}) causes reindentation when you type it as the
1283 second component of a C style block comment opener (@samp{/*}) or a
1284 C++ line comment opener (@samp{//}) respectively, but only if the
1285 comment opener is the first thing on the line (i.e., there's only
1286 whitespace before it).
1287
1288 Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} so that typing a slash at
1289 the start of a line within a block comment will terminate the
1290 comment. You don't need to have electric minor mode enabled to get
1291 this behavior. @xref{Clean-ups}.
1292
1293 In AWK mode, @samp{*} and @samp{/} do not delimit comments and are not
1294 electric.
1295
1296 @item <
1297 @kindex <
1298 @itemx >
1299 @kindex >
1300 @findex c-electric-lt-gt
1301 @findex electric-lt-gt (c-)
1302 A less-than or greater-than sign (bound to @code{c-electric-lt-gt}) is
1303 electric in two circumstances: when it is an angle bracket in a C++
1304 @samp{template} declaration (and similar constructs in other
1305 languages) and when it is the second of two @kbd{<} or @kbd{>}
1306 characters in a C++ style stream operator. In either case, the line
1307 is reindented. Angle brackets in C @samp{#include} directives are not
1308 electric.
1309
1310 @item (
1311 @kindex (
1312 @itemx )
1313 @kindex )
1314 @findex c-electric-paren
1315 @findex electric-paren (c-)
1316 The normal parenthesis characters @samp{(} and @samp{)} (bound to
1317 @code{c-electric-paren}) reindent the current line. This is useful
1318 for getting the closing parenthesis of an argument list aligned
1319 automatically.
1320
1321 You can also configure @ccmode{} to insert a space automatically
1322 between a function name and the @samp{(} you've just typed, and to
1323 remove it automatically after typing @samp{)}, should the argument
1324 list be empty. You don't need to have electric minor mode enabled to
1325 get these actions. @xref{Clean-ups}.
1326
1327 @item @{
1328 @kindex @{
1329 @itemx @}
1330 @kindex @}
1331 @findex c-electric-brace
1332 @findex electric-brace (c-)
1333 Typing a brace (bound to @code{c-electric-brace}) reindents the
1334 current line. Also, one or more newlines might be inserted if
1335 auto-newline minor mode is enabled. @xref{Auto-newlines}.
1336 Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} to compact excess whitespace
1337 inserted by auto-newline mode in certain circumstances.
1338 @xref{Clean-ups}.
1339
1340 @item :
1341 @kindex :
1342 @findex c-electric-colon
1343 @findex electric-colon (c-)
1344 Typing a colon (bound to @code{c-electric-colon}) reindents the
1345 current line. Additionally, one or more newlines might be inserted if
1346 auto-newline minor mode is enabled. @xref{Auto-newlines}. If you
1347 type a second colon immediately after such an auto-newline, by default
1348 the whitespace between the two colons is removed, leaving a C++ scope
1349 operator. @xref{Clean-ups}.
1350
1351 If you prefer, you can insert @samp{::} in a single operation,
1352 avoiding all these spurious reindentations, newlines, and clean-ups.
1353 @xref{Other Commands}.
1354
1355 @item ;
1356 @kindex ;
1357 @itemx ,
1358 @kindex ,
1359 @findex c-electric-semi&comma
1360 @findex electric-semi&comma (c-)
1361 Typing a semicolon or comma (bound to @code{c-electric-semi&comma})
1362 reindents the current line. Also, a newline might be inserted if
1363 auto-newline minor mode is enabled. @xref{Auto-newlines}.
1364 Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} so that when auto-newline
1365 has inserted whitespace after a @samp{@}}, it will be removed again
1366 when you type a semicolon or comma just after it. @xref{Clean-ups}.
1367
1368 @end table
1369
1370 @deffn Command c-electric-continued-statement
1371 @findex electric-continued-statement (c-)
1372
1373 Certain keywords are electric, causing reindentation when they are
1374 preceded only by whitespace on the line. The keywords are those that
1375 continue an earlier statement instead of starting a new one:
1376 @code{else}, @code{while}, @code{catch} (only in C++ and Java) and
1377 @code{finally} (only in Java).
1378
1379 An example:
1380
1381 @example
1382 @group
1383 for (i = 0; i < 17; i++)
1384 if (a[i])
1385 res += a[i]->offset;
1386 else
1387 @end group
1388 @end example
1389
1390 Here, the @code{else} should be indented like the preceding @code{if},
1391 since it continues that statement. @ccmode{} will automatically
1392 reindent it after the @code{else} has been typed in full, since only
1393 then is it possible to decide whether it's a new statement or a
1394 continuation of the preceding @code{if}.
1395
1396 @vindex abbrev-mode
1397 @findex abbrev-mode
1398 @cindex Abbrev mode
1399 @ccmode{} uses Abbrev mode (@pxref{Abbrevs,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}})
1400 to accomplish this. It's therefore turned on by default in all language
1401 modes except IDL mode, since CORBA IDL doesn't have any statements.
1402 @end deffn
1403
1404
1405 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1406 @node Auto-newlines, Hungry WS Deletion, Electric Keys, Commands
1407 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1408 @section Auto-newline Insertion
1409 @cindex auto-newline
1410 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1411
1412 When you have @dfn{Auto-newline minor mode} enabled (@pxref{Minor
1413 Modes}), @ccmode{} inserts newlines for you automatically (in certain
1414 syntactic contexts) when you type a left or right brace, a colon, a
1415 semicolon, or a comma. Sometimes a newline appears before the
1416 character you type, sometimes after it, sometimes both.
1417
1418 Auto-newline only triggers when the following conditions hold:
1419
1420 @itemize @bullet
1421 @item
1422 Auto-newline minor mode is enabled, as evidenced by the indicator
1423 @samp{a} after the mode name on the modeline (e.g., @samp{C/a} or
1424 @samp{C/la}).
1425
1426 @item
1427 The character was typed at the end of a line, or with only whitespace
1428 after it, and possibly a @samp{\} escaping the newline.
1429
1430 @item
1431 The character is not on its own line already. (This applies only to
1432 insertion of a newline @emph{before} the character.)
1433
1434 @item
1435 @cindex literal
1436 @cindex syntactic whitespace
1437 The character was not typed inside of a literal @footnote{A
1438 @dfn{literal} is defined as any comment, string, or preprocessor macro
1439 definition. These constructs are also known as @dfn{syntactic
1440 whitespace} since they are usually ignored when scanning C code.}.
1441
1442 @item
1443 No numeric argument was supplied to the command (i.e., it was typed as
1444 normal, with no @kbd{C-u} prefix).
1445 @end itemize
1446
1447 You can configure the precise circumstances in which newlines get
1448 inserted (see @pxref{Custom Auto-newlines}). Typically, the style
1449 system (@pxref{Styles}) will have set this up for you, so you probably
1450 won't have to bother.
1451
1452 Sometimes @ccmode{} inserts an auto-newline where you don't want one,
1453 such as after a @samp{@}} when you're about to type a @samp{;}.
1454 Hungry deletion can help here (@pxref{Hungry WS Deletion}), or you can
1455 activate an appropriate @dfn{clean-up}, which will remove the excess
1456 whitespace after you've typed the @samp{;}. See @ref{Clean-ups} for a
1457 full description. See also @ref{Electric Keys} for a summary of
1458 clean-ups listed by key.
1459
1460
1461 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1462 @node Hungry WS Deletion, Subword Movement, Auto-newlines, Commands
1463 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1464 @section Hungry Deletion of Whitespace
1465 @cindex hungry-deletion
1466 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1467
1468 If you want to delete an entire block of whitespace at point, you can
1469 use @dfn{hungry deletion}. This deletes all the contiguous whitespace
1470 either before point or after point in a single operation.
1471 ``Whitespace'' here includes tabs and newlines, but not comments or
1472 preprocessor commands. Hungry deletion can markedly cut down on the
1473 number of times you have to hit deletion keys when, for example,
1474 you've made a mistake on the preceding line and have already pressed
1475 @kbd{C-j}.
1476
1477 Hungry deletion is a simple feature that some people find extremely
1478 useful. In fact, you might find yourself wanting it in @strong{all}
1479 your editing modes!
1480
1481 Loosely speaking, in what follows, @dfn{@key{DEL}} means ``the
1482 backspace key'' and @dfn{@key{DELETE}} means ``the forward delete
1483 key''. This is discussed in more detail below.
1484
1485 There are two different ways you can use hungry deletion:
1486
1487 @table @asis
1488 @item Using @dfn{Hungry Delete Mode} with @kbd{@key{DEL}} and @kbd{C-d}
1489 Here you toggle Hungry Delete minor mode with @kbd{M-x
1490 c-toggle-hungry-state}@footnote{Prior to @ccmode{} 5.31, this command
1491 was bound to @kbd{C-c C-d}. @kbd{C-c C-d} is now the default binding
1492 for @code{c-hungry-delete-forward}.} (@pxref{Minor Modes}.) This
1493 makes @kbd{@key{DEL}} and @kbd{C-d} do backwards and forward hungry
1494 deletion.
1495
1496 @table @asis
1497 @item @kbd{@key{DEL}} (@code{c-electric-backspace})
1498 @kindex DEL
1499 @findex c-electric-backspace
1500 @findex electric-backspace (c-)
1501 This command is run by default when you hit the @kbd{DEL} key. When
1502 hungry delete mode is enabled, it deletes any amount of whitespace in
1503 the backwards direction. Otherwise, or when used with a prefix
1504 argument or in a literal (@pxref{Auto-newlines}), the command just
1505 deletes backwards in the usual way. (More precisely, it calls the
1506 function contained in the variable @code{c-backspace-function},
1507 passing it the prefix argument, if any.)
1508
1509 @item @code{c-backspace-function}
1510 @vindex c-backspace-function
1511 @vindex backspace-function (c-)
1512 @findex backward-delete-char-untabify
1513 Hook that gets called by @code{c-electric-backspace} when it doesn't
1514 do an ``electric'' deletion of the preceding whitespace. The default
1515 value is @code{backward-delete-char-untabify}
1516 (@pxref{Deletion,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}, the function which
1517 deletes a single character.
1518
1519 @item @kbd{C-d} (@code{c-electric-delete-forward})
1520 @kindex C-d
1521 @findex c-electric-delete-forward
1522 @findex electric-delete-forward (c-)
1523 This function, which is bound to @kbd{C-d} by default, works just like
1524 @code{c-electric-backspace} but in the forward direction. When it
1525 doesn't do an ``electric'' deletion of the following whitespace, it
1526 just does @code{delete-char}, more or less. (Strictly speaking, it
1527 calls the function in @code{c-delete-function} with the prefix
1528 argument.)
1529
1530 @item @code{c-delete-function}
1531 @vindex c-delete-function
1532 @vindex delete-function (c-)
1533 @findex delete-char
1534 Hook that gets called by @code{c-electric-delete-forward} when it
1535 doesn't do an ``electric'' deletion of the following whitespace. The
1536 default value is @code{delete-char}.
1537 @end table
1538
1539 @item Using Distinct Bindings
1540 The other (newer and recommended) way to use hungry deletion is to
1541 perform @code{c-hungry-delete-backwards} and
1542 @code{c-hungry-delete-forward} directly through their key sequences
1543 rather than using the minor mode toggling.
1544
1545 @table @asis
1546 @item @kbd{C-c C-@key{DEL}}, or @kbd{C-c @key{DEL}} (@code{c-hungry-delete-backwards})@footnote{This command was formerly known as @code{c-hungry-backspace}.}
1547 @kindex C-c C-<backspace>
1548 @kindex C-c <backspace>
1549 @kindex C-c C-DEL
1550 @kindex C-c DEL
1551 @findex c-hungry-delete-backwards
1552 @findex hungry-delete-backwards (c-)
1553 Delete any amount of whitespace in the backwards direction (regardless
1554 whether hungry-delete mode is enabled or not). This command is bound
1555 to both @kbd{C-c C-@key{DEL}} and @kbd{C-c @key{DEL}}, since the more
1556 natural one, @kbd{C-c C-@key{DEL}}, is sometimes difficult to type at
1557 a character terminal.
1558
1559 @item @kbd{C-c C-d}, @kbd{C-c C-@key{DELETE}}, or @kbd{C-c @key{DELETE}} (@code{c-hungry-delete-forward})
1560 @kindex C-c C-d
1561 @kindex C-c C-<DELETE>
1562 @kindex C-c <DELETE>
1563 @findex c-hungry-delete-forward
1564 @findex hungry-delete-forward (c-)
1565 Delete any amount of whitespace in the forward direction (regardless
1566 whether hungry-delete mode is enabled or not). This command is bound
1567 to both @kbd{C-c C-@key{DELETE}} and @kbd{C-c @key{DELETE}} for the
1568 same reason as for @key{DEL} above.
1569 @end table
1570 @end table
1571
1572 @kindex <delete>
1573 @kindex <backspace>
1574
1575 When we talk about @kbd{@key{DEL}}, and @kbd{@key{DELETE}} above, we
1576 actually do so without connecting them to the physical keys commonly
1577 known as @key{Backspace} and @key{Delete}. The default bindings to
1578 those two keys depends on the flavor of (X)Emacs you are using.
1579
1580 @findex c-electric-delete
1581 @findex electric-delete (c-)
1582 @findex c-hungry-delete
1583 @findex hungry-delete (c-)
1584 @vindex delete-key-deletes-forward
1585 In XEmacs 20.3 and beyond, the @key{Backspace} key is bound to
1586 @code{c-electric-backspace} and the @key{Delete} key is bound to
1587 @code{c-electric-delete}. You control the direction it deletes in by
1588 setting the variable @code{delete-key-deletes-forward}, a standard
1589 XEmacs variable.
1590 @c This variable is encapsulated by XEmacs's (defsubst delete-forward-p ...).
1591 When this variable is non-@code{nil}, @code{c-electric-delete} will do
1592 forward deletion with @code{c-electric-delete-forward}, otherwise it
1593 does backward deletion with @code{c-electric-backspace}. Similarly,
1594 @kbd{C-c @key{Delete}} and @kbd{C-c C-@key{Delete}} are bound to
1595 @code{c-hungry-delete} which is controlled in the same way by
1596 @code{delete-key-deletes-forward}.
1597
1598 @findex normal-erase-is-backspace-mode
1599
1600 Emacs 21 and later automatically binds @key{Backspace} and
1601 @key{Delete} to @kbd{DEL} and @kbd{C-d} according to your environment,
1602 and @ccmode{} extends those bindings to @kbd{C-c C-@key{Backspace}}
1603 etc. If you need to change the bindings through
1604 @code{normal-erase-is-backspace-mode} then @ccmode{} will also adapt
1605 its extended bindings accordingly.
1606
1607 In earlier (X)Emacs versions, @ccmode{} doesn't bind either
1608 @key{Backspace} or @key{Delete} directly. Only the key codes
1609 @kbd{DEL} and @kbd{C-d} are bound, and it's up to the default bindings
1610 to map the physical keys to them. You might need to modify this
1611 yourself if the defaults are unsuitable.
1612
1613 Getting your @key{Backspace} and @key{Delete} keys properly set up can
1614 sometimes be tricky. The information in @ref{DEL Does Not
1615 Delete,,,emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, might be helpful if you're having
1616 trouble with this in GNU Emacs.
1617
1618
1619 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1620 @node Subword Movement, Other Commands, Hungry WS Deletion, Commands
1621 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1622 @section Subword Movement and Editing
1623 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1624
1625 @cindex nomenclature
1626 @cindex subword
1627 In spite of the GNU Coding Standards, it is popular to name a symbol
1628 by mixing uppercase and lowercase letters, e.g., @samp{GtkWidget},
1629 @samp{EmacsFrameClass}, or @samp{NSGraphicsContext}. Here we call
1630 these mixed case symbols @dfn{nomenclatures}. Also, each capitalized
1631 (or completely uppercase) part of a nomenclature is called a
1632 @dfn{subword}. Here are some examples:
1633
1634 @multitable {@samp{NSGraphicsContext}} {@samp{NS}, @samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context}}
1635 @c This could be converted to @headitem when we require Texinfo 4.7
1636 @iftex
1637 @item @b{Nomenclature}
1638 @tab @b{Subwords}
1639 @end iftex
1640 @ifnottex
1641 @item Nomenclature
1642 @tab Subwords
1643 @item ---------------------------------------------------------
1644 @end ifnottex
1645 @item @samp{GtkWindow}
1646 @tab @samp{Gtk} and @samp{Window}
1647 @item @samp{EmacsFrameClass}
1648 @tab @samp{Emacs}, @samp{Frame}, and @samp{Class}
1649 @item @samp{NSGraphicsContext}
1650 @tab @samp{NS}, @samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context}
1651 @end multitable
1652
1653 The subword minor mode replaces the basic word oriented movement and
1654 editing commands with variants that recognize subwords in a
1655 nomenclature and treat them as separate words:
1656
1657 @findex c-forward-subword
1658 @findex forward-subword (c-)
1659 @findex c-backward-subword
1660 @findex backward-subword (c-)
1661 @findex c-mark-subword
1662 @findex mark-subword (c-)
1663 @findex c-kill-subword
1664 @findex kill-subword (c-)
1665 @findex c-backward-kill-subword
1666 @findex backward-kill-subword (c-)
1667 @findex c-transpose-subwords
1668 @findex transpose-subwords (c-)
1669 @findex c-capitalize-subword
1670 @findex capitalize-subword (c-)
1671 @findex c-upcase-subword
1672 @findex upcase-subword (c-)
1673 @findex c-downcase-subword
1674 @findex downcase-subword (c-)
1675 @multitable @columnfractions .20 .40 .40
1676 @c This could be converted to @headitem when we require Texinfo 4.7
1677 @iftex
1678 @item @b{Key} @tab @b{Word oriented command} @tab @b{Subword oriented command}
1679 @end iftex
1680 @ifnottex
1681 @item Key @tab Word oriented command @tab Subword oriented command
1682 @item ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1683 @end ifnottex
1684 @item @kbd{M-f} @tab @code{forward-word} @tab @code{c-forward-subword}
1685 @item @kbd{M-b} @tab @code{backward-word} @tab @code{c-backward-subword}
1686 @item @kbd{M-@@} @tab @code{mark-word} @tab @code{c-mark-subword}
1687 @item @kbd{M-d} @tab @code{kill-word} @tab @code{c-kill-subword}
1688 @item @kbd{M-DEL} @tab @code{backward-kill-word} @tab @code{c-backward-kill-subword}
1689 @item @kbd{M-t} @tab @code{transpose-words} @tab @code{c-transpose-subwords}
1690 @item @kbd{M-c} @tab @code{capitalize-word} @tab @code{c-capitalize-subword}
1691 @item @kbd{M-u} @tab @code{upcase-word} @tab @code{c-upcase-subword}
1692 @item @kbd{M-l} @tab @code{downcase-word} @tab @code{c-downcase-subword}
1693 @end multitable
1694
1695 Note that if you have changed the key bindings for the word oriented
1696 commands in your @file{.emacs} or a similar place, the keys you have
1697 configured are also used for the corresponding subword oriented
1698 commands.
1699
1700 Type @kbd{C-c C-w} to toggle subword mode on and off. To make the
1701 mode turn on automatically, put the following code in your
1702 @file{.emacs}:
1703
1704 @example
1705 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook
1706 (lambda () (subword-mode 1)))
1707 @end example
1708
1709 As a bonus, you can also use @code{subword-mode} in non-@ccmode{}
1710 buffers by typing @kbd{M-x subword-mode}.
1711
1712 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1713 @node Other Commands, , Subword Movement, Commands
1714 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1715 @section Other Commands
1716 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1717
1718 Here are the various other commands that didn't fit anywhere else:
1719
1720 @table @asis
1721 @item @kbd{C-c .} (@code{c-set-style})
1722 @kindex C-c .
1723 @findex c-set-style
1724 @findex set-style (c-)
1725 Switch to the specified style in the current buffer. Use like this:
1726
1727 @example
1728 @kbd{C-c . @var{style-name} @key{RET}}
1729 @end example
1730
1731 You can use the @key{TAB} in the normal way to do completion on the
1732 style name. Note that all style names are case insensitive, even the
1733 ones you define yourself.
1734
1735 Setting a style in this way does @emph{not} automatically reindent your
1736 file. For commands that you can use to view the effect of your changes,
1737 see @ref{Indentation Commands} and @ref{Filling and Breaking}.
1738
1739 For details of the @ccmode{} style system, see @ref{Styles}.
1740 @item @kbd{C-c :} (@code{c-scope-operator})
1741 @kindex C-c :
1742 @findex c-scope-operator
1743 @findex scope-operator (c-)
1744 In C++, it is also sometimes desirable to insert the double-colon scope
1745 operator without performing the electric behavior of colon insertion.
1746 @kbd{C-c :} does just this.
1747
1748 @item @kbd{C-c C-\} (@code{c-backslash-region})
1749 @kindex C-c C-\
1750 @findex c-backslash-region
1751 @findex backslash-region (c-)
1752 This function inserts and aligns or deletes end-of-line backslashes in
1753 the current region. These are typically used in multi-line macros.
1754
1755 With no prefix argument, it inserts any missing backslashes and aligns
1756 them according to the @code{c-backslash-column} and
1757 @code{c-backslash-max-column} variables. With a prefix argument, it
1758 deletes any backslashes.
1759
1760 The function does not modify blank lines at the start of the region. If
1761 the region ends at the start of a line, it always deletes the backslash
1762 (if any) at the end of the previous line.
1763
1764 To customize the precise workings of this command, @ref{Custom Macros}.
1765 @end table
1766
1767 @noindent
1768 The recommended line breaking function, @code{c-context-line-break}
1769 (@pxref{Filling and Breaking}), is especially nice if you edit
1770 multiline macros frequently. When used inside a macro, it
1771 automatically inserts and adjusts the mandatory backslash at the end
1772 of the line to keep the macro together, and it leaves the point at the
1773 right indentation column for the code. Thus you can write code inside
1774 macros almost exactly as you can elsewhere, without having to bother
1775 with the trailing backslashes.
1776
1777 @table @asis
1778 @item @kbd{C-c C-e} (@code{c-macro-expand})
1779 @kindex C-c C-e
1780 @findex c-macro-expand
1781 @findex macro-expand (c-)
1782 This command expands C, C++, Objective C or Pike macros in the region,
1783 using an appropriate external preprocessor program. Normally it
1784 displays its output in a temporary buffer, but if you give it a prefix
1785 arg (with @kbd{C-u C-c C-e}) it will overwrite the original region
1786 with the expansion.
1787
1788 The command does not work in any of the other modes, and the key
1789 sequence is not bound in these other modes.
1790
1791 @code{c-macro-expand} isn't actually part of @ccmode{}, even though it
1792 is bound to a @ccmode{} key sequence. If you need help setting it up
1793 or have other problems with it, you can either read its source code or
1794 ask for help in the standard (X)Emacs forums.
1795 @end table
1796
1797 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1798 @node Font Locking, Config Basics, Commands, Top
1799 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1800 @chapter Font Locking
1801 @cindex font locking
1802 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1803
1804 @cindex Font Lock mode
1805
1806 @ccmode{} provides font locking for its supported languages by
1807 supplying patterns for use with Font Lock mode. This means that you
1808 get distinct faces on the various syntactic parts such as comments,
1809 strings, keywords and types, which is very helpful in telling them
1810 apart at a glance and discovering syntactic errors. @xref{Font
1811 Lock,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, for ways to enable font locking in
1812 @ccmode{} buffers.
1813
1814 @strong{Please note:} The font locking in AWK mode is currently not
1815 integrated with the rest of @ccmode{}. Only the last section of this
1816 chapter, @ref{AWK Mode Font Locking}, applies to AWK@. The other
1817 sections apply to the other languages.
1818
1819 @menu
1820 * Font Locking Preliminaries::
1821 * Faces::
1822 * Doc Comments::
1823 * AWK Mode Font Locking::
1824 @end menu
1825
1826
1827 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1828 @node Font Locking Preliminaries, Faces, Font Locking, Font Locking
1829 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1830 @section Font Locking Preliminaries
1831 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1832
1833 The font locking for most of the @ccmode{} languages were provided
1834 directly by the Font Lock package prior to version 5.30 of @ccmode{}.
1835 In the transition to @ccmode{} the patterns have been reworked
1836 completely and are applied uniformly across all the languages except AWK
1837 mode, just like the indentation rules (although each language still has
1838 some peculiarities of its own, of course). Since the languages
1839 previously had completely separate font locking patterns, this means
1840 that it's a bit different in most languages now.
1841
1842 The main goal for the font locking in @ccmode{} is accuracy, to provide
1843 a dependable aid in recognizing the various constructs. Some, like
1844 strings and comments, are easy to recognize while others, like
1845 declarations and types, can be very tricky. @ccmode{} can go to great
1846 lengths to recognize declarations and casts correctly, especially when
1847 the types aren't recognized by standard patterns. This is a fairly
1848 demanding analysis which can be slow on older hardware, and it can
1849 therefore be disabled by choosing a lower decoration level with the
1850 variable @code{font-lock-maximum-decoration} (@pxref{Font Lock,,,
1851 emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}).
1852
1853 @vindex font-lock-maximum-decoration
1854
1855 The decoration levels are used as follows:
1856
1857 @enumerate
1858 @comment 1
1859 @item
1860 Minimal font locking: Fontify only comments, strings and preprocessor
1861 directives (in the languages that use cpp).
1862
1863 @comment 2
1864 @item
1865 Fast font locking: In addition to level 1, fontify keywords, simple
1866 types and declarations that are easy to recognize. The variables
1867 @code{*-font-lock-extra-types} (where @samp{*} is the name of the
1868 language) are used to recognize types (see below). Documentation
1869 comments like Javadoc are fontified according to
1870 @code{c-doc-comment-style} (@pxref{Doc Comments}).
1871
1872 Use this if you think the font locking is too slow. It's the closest
1873 corresponding level to level 3 in the old font lock patterns.
1874
1875 @comment 3
1876 @item
1877 Accurate font locking: Like level 2 but uses a different approach that
1878 can recognize types and declarations much more accurately. The
1879 @code{*-font-lock-extra-types} variables are still used, but user
1880 defined types are recognized correctly anyway in most cases. Therefore
1881 those variables should be fairly restrictive and not contain patterns
1882 that are uncertain.
1883
1884 @cindex Lazy Lock mode
1885 @cindex Just-in-time Lock mode
1886
1887 This level is designed for fairly modern hardware and a font lock
1888 support mode like Lazy Lock or Just-in-time Lock mode that only
1889 fontifies the parts that are actually shown. Fontifying the whole
1890 buffer at once can easily get bothersomely slow even on contemporary
1891 hardware. @xref{Font Lock,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}.
1892 @end enumerate
1893
1894 @cindex user defined types
1895 @cindex types, user defined
1896
1897 Since user defined types are hard to recognize you can provide
1898 additional regexps to match those you use:
1899
1900 @defopt c-font-lock-extra-types
1901 @defoptx c++-font-lock-extra-types
1902 @defoptx objc-font-lock-extra-types
1903 @defoptx java-font-lock-extra-types
1904 @defoptx idl-font-lock-extra-types
1905 @defoptx pike-font-lock-extra-types
1906 For each language there's a variable @code{*-font-lock-extra-types},
1907 where @samp{*} stands for the language in question. It contains a list
1908 of regexps that matches identifiers that should be recognized as types,
1909 e.g., @samp{\\sw+_t} to recognize all identifiers ending with @samp{_t}
1910 as is customary in C code. Each regexp should not match more than a
1911 single identifier.
1912
1913 The default values contain regexps for many types in standard runtime
1914 libraries that are otherwise difficult to recognize, and patterns for
1915 standard type naming conventions like the @samp{_t} suffix in C and C++.
1916 Java, Objective-C and Pike have as a convention to start class names
1917 with capitals, so there are patterns for that in those languages.
1918
1919 Despite the names of these variables, they are not only used for
1920 fontification but in other places as well where @ccmode{} needs to
1921 recognize types.
1922 @end defopt
1923
1924
1925 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1926 @node Faces, Doc Comments, Font Locking Preliminaries, Font Locking
1927 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1928 @section Faces
1929 @cindex faces
1930 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1931
1932 @ccmode{} attempts to use the standard faces for programming languages
1933 in accordance with their intended purposes as far as possible. No extra
1934 faces are currently provided, with the exception of a replacement face
1935 @code{c-invalid-face} for emacsen that don't provide
1936 @code{font-lock-warning-face}.
1937
1938 @itemize @bullet
1939 @item
1940 @vindex font-lock-comment-face
1941 Normal comments are fontified in @code{font-lock-comment-face}.
1942
1943 @item
1944 @vindex font-lock-doc-face
1945 @vindex font-lock-doc-string-face
1946 @vindex font-lock-comment-face
1947 Comments that are recognized as documentation (@pxref{Doc Comments})
1948 get @code{font-lock-doc-face} (Emacs) or
1949 @code{font-lock-doc-string-face} (XEmacs) if those faces exist. If
1950 they don't then @code{font-lock-comment-face} is used.
1951
1952 @item
1953 @vindex font-lock-string-face
1954 String and character literals are fontified in
1955 @code{font-lock-string-face}.
1956
1957 @item
1958 @vindex font-lock-keyword-face
1959 Keywords are fontified with @code{font-lock-keyword-face}.
1960
1961 @item
1962 @vindex font-lock-function-name-face
1963 @code{font-lock-function-name-face} is used for function names in
1964 declarations and definitions, and classes in those contexts. It's also
1965 used for preprocessor defines with arguments.
1966
1967 @item
1968 @vindex font-lock-variable-name-face
1969 Variables in declarations and definitions, and other identifiers in such
1970 variable contexts, get @code{font-lock-variable-name-face}. It's also
1971 used for preprocessor defines without arguments.
1972
1973 @item
1974 @vindex font-lock-constant-face
1975 @vindex font-lock-reference-face
1976 Builtin constants are fontified in @code{font-lock-constant-face} if it
1977 exists, @code{font-lock-reference-face} otherwise. As opposed to the
1978 preceding two faces, this is used on the names in expressions, and it's
1979 not used in declarations, even if there happen to be a @samp{const} in
1980 them somewhere.
1981
1982 @item
1983 @vindex font-lock-type-face
1984 @code{font-lock-type-face} is put on types (both predefined and user
1985 defined) and classes in type contexts.
1986
1987 @item
1988 @vindex font-lock-constant-face
1989 @vindex font-lock-reference-face
1990 Label identifiers get @code{font-lock-constant-face} if it exists,
1991 @code{font-lock-reference-face} otherwise.
1992
1993 @item
1994 Name qualifiers and identifiers for scope constructs are fontified like
1995 labels.
1996
1997 @item
1998 Special markup inside documentation comments are also fontified like
1999 labels.
2000
2001 @item
2002 @vindex font-lock-preprocessor-face
2003 @vindex font-lock-builtin-face
2004 @vindex font-lock-reference-face
2005 Preprocessor directives get @code{font-lock-preprocessor-face} if it
2006 exists (i.e., XEmacs). In Emacs they get @code{font-lock-builtin-face}
2007 or @code{font-lock-reference-face}, for lack of a closer equivalent.
2008
2009 @item
2010 @vindex font-lock-warning-face
2011 @vindex c-invalid-face
2012 @vindex invalid-face (c-)
2013 Some kinds of syntactic errors are fontified with
2014 @code{font-lock-warning-face} in Emacs. In older XEmacs versions
2015 there's no corresponding standard face, so there a special
2016 @code{c-invalid-face} is used, which is defined to stand out sharply by
2017 default.
2018
2019 Note that it's not used for @samp{#error} or @samp{#warning} directives,
2020 since those aren't syntactic errors in themselves.
2021 @end itemize
2022
2023
2024 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2025 @node Doc Comments, AWK Mode Font Locking, Faces, Font Locking
2026 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2027 @section Documentation Comments
2028 @cindex documentation comments
2029 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2030
2031 There are various tools to supply documentation in the source as
2032 specially structured comments, e.g., the standard Javadoc tool in Java.
2033 @ccmode{} provides an extensible mechanism to fontify such comments and
2034 the special markup inside them.
2035
2036 @defopt c-doc-comment-style
2037 @vindex doc-comment-style (c-)
2038 This is a style variable that specifies which documentation comment
2039 style to recognize, e.g., @code{javadoc} for Javadoc comments.
2040
2041 The value may also be a list of styles, in which case all of them are
2042 recognized simultaneously (presumably with markup cues that don't
2043 conflict).
2044
2045 The value may also be an association list to specify different comment
2046 styles for different languages. The symbol for the major mode is then
2047 looked up in the alist, and the value of that element is interpreted as
2048 above if found. If it isn't found then the symbol @code{other} is looked up
2049 and its value is used instead.
2050
2051 The default value for @code{c-doc-comment-style} is
2052 @w{@code{((java-mode . javadoc) (pike-mode . autodoc) (c-mode . gtkdoc))}}.
2053
2054 Note that @ccmode{} uses this variable to set other variables that
2055 handle fontification etc. That's done at mode initialization or when
2056 you switch to a style which sets this variable. Thus, if you change it
2057 in some other way, e.g., interactively in a CC Mode buffer, you will need
2058 to do @kbd{M-x java-mode} (or whatever mode you're currently using) to
2059 reinitialize.
2060
2061 @findex c-setup-doc-comment-style
2062 @findex setup-doc-comment-style (c-)
2063 Note also that when @ccmode{} starts up, the other variables are
2064 modified before the mode hooks are run. If you change this variable in
2065 a mode hook, you'll have to call @code{c-setup-doc-comment-style}
2066 afterwards to redo that work.
2067 @end defopt
2068
2069 @ccmode{} currently provides handing of the following doc comment
2070 styles:
2071
2072 @table @code
2073 @item javadoc
2074 @cindex Javadoc markup
2075 Javadoc comments, the standard tool in Java.
2076
2077 @item autodoc
2078 @cindex Pike autodoc markup
2079 For Pike autodoc markup, the standard in Pike.
2080
2081 @item gtkdoc
2082 @cindex GtkDoc markup
2083 For GtkDoc markup, widely used in the Gnome community.
2084 @end table
2085
2086 The above is by no means complete. If you'd like to see support for
2087 other doc comment styles, please let us know (@pxref{Mailing Lists and
2088 Bug Reports}).
2089
2090 You can also write your own doc comment fontification support to use
2091 with @code{c-doc-comment-style}: Supply a variable or function
2092 @code{*-font-lock-keywords} where @samp{*} is the name you want to use
2093 in @code{c-doc-comment-style}. If it's a variable, it's prepended to
2094 @code{font-lock-keywords}. If it's a function, it's called at mode
2095 initialization and the result is prepended. For an example, see
2096 @code{javadoc-font-lock-keywords} in @file{cc-fonts.el}.
2097
2098 If you add support for another doc comment style, please consider
2099 contributing it: send a note to @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}.
2100
2101
2102 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2103 @node AWK Mode Font Locking, , Doc Comments, Font Locking
2104 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2105 @section AWK Mode Font Locking
2106 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2107
2108 The general appearance of font-locking in AWK mode is much like in any
2109 other programming mode. @xref{Faces for Font Lock,,,elisp, GNU Emacs
2110 Lisp Reference Manual}.
2111
2112 The following faces are, however, used in a non-standard fashion in
2113 AWK mode:
2114
2115 @table @asis
2116 @item @code{font-lock-variable-name-face}
2117 This face was intended for variable declarations. Since variables are
2118 not declared in AWK, this face is used instead for AWK system
2119 variables (such as @code{NF}) and ``Special File Names'' (such as
2120 @code{"/dev/stderr"}).
2121
2122 @item @code{font-lock-builtin-face} (Emacs)/@code{font-lock-preprocessor-face} (XEmacs)
2123 This face is normally used for preprocessor directives in @ccmode{}.
2124 There are no such things in AWK, so this face is used instead for
2125 standard functions (such as @code{match}).
2126
2127 @item @code{font-lock-string-face}
2128 As well as being used for strings, including localizable strings,
2129 (delimited by @samp{"} and @samp{_"}), this face is also used for AWK
2130 regular expressions (delimited by @samp{/}).
2131
2132 @item @code{font-lock-warning-face} (Emacs)/@code{c-invalid-face} (XEmacs)
2133 This face highlights the following syntactically invalid AWK
2134 constructs:
2135
2136 @itemize @bullet
2137 @item
2138 An unterminated string or regular expression. Here the opening
2139 delimiter (@samp{"} or @samp{/} or @samp{_"}) is displayed in
2140 @code{font-lock-warning-face}. This is most noticeable when typing in a
2141 new string/regular expression into a buffer, when the warning-face
2142 serves as a continual reminder to terminate the construct.
2143
2144 AWK mode fontifies unterminated strings/regular expressions
2145 differently from other modes: Only the text up to the end of the line
2146 is fontified as a string (escaped newlines being handled correctly),
2147 rather than the text up to the next string quote.
2148
2149 @item
2150 A space between the function name and opening parenthesis when calling
2151 a user function. The last character of the function name and the
2152 opening parenthesis are highlighted. This font-locking rule will
2153 spuriously highlight a valid concatenation expression where an
2154 identifier precedes a parenthesized expression. Unfortunately.
2155
2156 @item
2157 Whitespace following the @samp{\} in what otherwise looks like an
2158 escaped newline. The @samp{\} is highlighted.
2159 @end itemize
2160 @end table
2161
2162
2163 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2164 @node Config Basics, Custom Filling and Breaking, Font Locking, Top
2165 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2166 @chapter Configuration Basics
2167 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2168
2169 @cindex Emacs Initialization File
2170 @cindex Configuration
2171 You configure @ccmode{} by setting Lisp variables and calling (and
2172 perhaps writing) Lisp functions@footnote{DON'T PANIC!!! This isn't
2173 difficult.}, which is usually done by adding code to an Emacs
2174 initialization file. This file might be @file{site-start.el} or
2175 @file{.emacs} or @file{init.el} or @file{default.el} or perhaps some
2176 other file. @xref{Init File,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}. For
2177 the sake of conciseness, we just call this file ``your @file{.emacs}''
2178 throughout the rest of the manual.
2179
2180 Several of these variables (currently 16), are known collectively as
2181 @dfn{style variables}. @ccmode{} provides a special mechanism, known
2182 as @dfn{styles} to make it easier to set these variables as a group,
2183 to ``inherit'' settings from one style into another, and so on. Style
2184 variables remain ordinary Lisp variables, whose values can be read and
2185 changed independently of the style system. @xref{Style Variables}.
2186
2187 There are several ways you can write the code, depending on the
2188 precise effect you want---they are described further down on this page.
2189 If you are new to @ccmode{}, we suggest you begin with the simplest
2190 method, ``Top-level commands or the customization interface''.
2191
2192 If you make conflicting settings in several of these ways, the way
2193 that takes precedence is the one that appears latest in this list:
2194 @itemize @w{}
2195 @item
2196 @table @asis
2197 @item Style
2198 @itemx File Style@footnote{In earlier versions of @ccmode{}, a File Style setting took precedence over any other setting apart from a File Local Variable setting.}
2199 @itemx Top-level command or ``customization interface''
2200 @itemx Hook
2201 @itemx File Local Variable setting
2202 @end table
2203 @end itemize
2204
2205 Here is a summary of the different ways of writing your configuration
2206 settings:
2207
2208 @table @asis
2209 @item Top-level commands or the ``customization interface''
2210 Most simply, you can write @code{setq} and similar commands at the top
2211 level of your @file{.emacs} file. When you load a @ccmode{} buffer,
2212 it initializes its configuration from these global values (at least,
2213 for those settings you have given values to), so it makes sense to
2214 have these @code{setq} commands run @emph{before} @ccmode{} is first
2215 initialized---in particular, before any call to @code{desktop-read}
2216 (@pxref{Saving Emacs Sessions,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}). For
2217 example, you might set c-basic-offset thus:
2218
2219 @example
2220 (setq c-basic-offset 4)
2221 @end example
2222
2223 You can use the more user friendly Customization interface instead,
2224 but this manual does not cover in detail how that works. To do this,
2225 start by typing @kbd{M-x customize-group @key{RET} c @key{RET}}.
2226 @xref{Easy Customization,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}.
2227 @c The following note really belongs in the Emacs manual.
2228 Emacs normally writes the customizations at the end of your
2229 @file{.emacs} file. If you use @code{desktop-read}, you should edit
2230 your @file{.emacs} to place the call to @code{desktop-read} @emph{after}
2231 the customizations.
2232
2233 The first initialization of @ccmode{} puts a snapshot of the
2234 configuration settings into the special style @code{user}.
2235 @xref{Built-in Styles}.
2236
2237 For basic use of Emacs, either of these ways of configuring is
2238 adequate. However, the settings are then the same in all @ccmode{}
2239 buffers and it can be clumsy to communicate them between programmers.
2240 For more flexibility, you'll want to use one (or both) of @ccmode{}'s
2241 more sophisticated facilities, hooks and styles.
2242
2243 @item Hooks
2244 An Emacs @dfn{hook} is a place to put Lisp functions that you want
2245 Emacs to execute later in specific circumstances.
2246 @xref{Hooks,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}. @ccmode{} supplies a main
2247 hook and a language-specific hook for each language it supports; any
2248 functions you put onto these hooks get executed as the last part of a
2249 buffer's initialization. Typically you put most of your customization
2250 within the main hook, and use the language-specific hooks to vary the
2251 customization settings between language modes. For example, if you
2252 wanted different (non-standard) values of @code{c-basic-offset} in C
2253 Mode and Java Mode buffers, you could do it like this:
2254
2255 @example
2256 @group
2257 (defun my-c-mode-hook ()
2258 (setq c-basic-offset 3))
2259 (add-hook 'c-mode-hook 'my-c-mode-hook)
2260
2261 (defun my-java-mode-hook ()
2262 (setq c-basic-offset 6))
2263 (add-hook 'java-mode-hook 'my-java-mode-hook)
2264 @end group
2265 @end example
2266
2267 See @ref{CC Hooks} for more details on the use of @ccmode{} hooks.
2268
2269 @item Styles
2270 A @ccmode{} @dfn{style} is a coherent collection of customizations
2271 with a name. At any time, exactly one style is active in each
2272 @ccmode{} buffer, either the one you have selected or a default.
2273 @ccmode{} is delivered with several existing styles. Additionally,
2274 you can create your own styles, possibly based on these existing
2275 styles. If you worked in a programming team called the ``Free
2276 Group'', which had its own coding standards, you might well have this
2277 in your @file{.emacs} file:
2278
2279 @example
2280 (setq c-default-style '((java-mode . "java")
2281 (awk-mode . "awk")
2282 (other . "free-group-style")))
2283 @end example
2284
2285 See @ref{Styles} for fuller details on using @ccmode{} styles and how
2286 to create them.
2287
2288 @item File Local Variable setting
2289 A @dfn{file local variable setting} is a setting which applies to an
2290 individual source file. You put this in a @dfn{local variables list},
2291 a special block at the end of the source file (@pxref{Specifying File
2292 Variables,,,@emacsman{}}).
2293
2294 @item File Styles
2295 A @dfn{file style} is a rarely used variant of the ``style'' mechanism
2296 described above, which applies to an individual source file.
2297 @xref{File Styles}. You use this by setting certain special variables
2298 in a local variables list (@pxref{Specifying File
2299 Variables,,,@emacsman{}}).
2300
2301 @item Hooks with Styles
2302 For ultimate flexibility, you can use hooks and styles together. For
2303 example, if your team were developing a product which required a
2304 Linux driver, you'd probably want to use the ``linux'' style for the
2305 driver, and your own team's style for the rest of the code. You
2306 could achieve this with code like this in your @file{.emacs}:
2307
2308 @example
2309 @group
2310 (defun my-c-mode-hook ()
2311 (c-set-style
2312 (if (and (buffer-file-name)
2313 (string-match "/usr/src/linux" (buffer-file-name)))
2314 "linux"
2315 "free-group-style")))
2316 (add-hook 'c-mode-hook 'my-c-mode-hook)
2317 @end group
2318 @end example
2319
2320 In a programming team, a hook is a also a good place for each member
2321 to put his own personal preferences. For example, you might be the
2322 only person in your team who likes Auto-newline minor mode. You could
2323 have it enabled by default by placing the following in your
2324 @file{.emacs}:
2325
2326 @example
2327 @group
2328 (defun my-turn-on-auto-newline ()
2329 (c-toggle-auto-newline 1))
2330 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-turn-on-auto-newline)
2331 @end group
2332 @end example
2333 @end table
2334
2335 @menu
2336 * CC Hooks::
2337 * Style Variables::
2338 * Styles::
2339 @end menu
2340
2341 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2342 @node CC Hooks, Style Variables, Config Basics, Config Basics
2343 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2344 @section Hooks
2345 @cindex mode hooks
2346 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2347 @c The node name is "CC Hooks" rather than "Hooks" because of a bug in
2348 @c some older versions of Info, e.g., the info.el in GNU Emacs 21.3.
2349 @c If you go to "Config Basics" and hit <CR> on the xref to "CC
2350 @c Hooks" the function Info-follow-reference searches for "*Note: CC
2351 @c Hooks" from the beginning of the page. If this node were instead
2352 @c named "Hooks", that search would spuriously find "*Note:
2353 @c Hooks(elisp)" and go to the wrong node.
2354
2355 @ccmode{} provides several hooks that you can use to customize the
2356 mode for your coding style. The main hook is
2357 @code{c-mode-common-hook}; typically, you'll put the bulk of your
2358 customizations here. In addition, each language mode has its own
2359 hook, allowing you to fine tune your settings individually for the
2360 different @ccmode{} languages, and there is a package initialization
2361 hook. Finally, there is @code{c-special-indent-hook}, which enables
2362 you to solve anomalous indentation problems. It is described in
2363 @ref{Other Indentation}, not here. All these hooks adhere to the
2364 standard Emacs conventions.
2365
2366 When you open a buffer, @ccmode{} first initializes it with the
2367 currently active style (@pxref{Styles}). Then it calls
2368 @code{c-mode-common-hook}, and finally it calls the language-specific
2369 hook. Thus, any style settings done in these hooks will override
2370 those set by @code{c-default-style}.
2371
2372 @defvar c-initialization-hook
2373 @vindex initialization-hook (c-)
2374 Hook run only once per Emacs session, when @ccmode{} is initialized.
2375 This is a good place to change key bindings (or add new ones) in any
2376 of the @ccmode{} key maps. @xref{Sample Init File}.
2377 @end defvar
2378
2379 @defvar c-mode-common-hook
2380 @vindex mode-common-hook (c-)
2381 Common hook across all languages. It's run immediately before the
2382 language specific hook.
2383 @end defvar
2384
2385 @defvar c-mode-hook
2386 @defvarx c++-mode-hook
2387 @defvarx objc-mode-hook
2388 @defvarx java-mode-hook
2389 @defvarx idl-mode-hook
2390 @defvarx pike-mode-hook
2391 @defvarx awk-mode-hook
2392 The language specific mode hooks. The appropriate one is run as the
2393 last thing when you enter that language mode.
2394 @end defvar
2395
2396 Although these hooks are variables defined in @ccmode{}, you can give
2397 them values before @ccmode{}'s code is loaded---indeed, this is the
2398 only way to use @code{c-initialization-hook}. Their values aren't
2399 overwritten when @ccmode{} gets loaded.
2400
2401 Here's a simplified example of what you can add to your @file{.emacs}
2402 file to do things whenever any @ccmode{} language is edited. See the
2403 Emacs manuals for more information on customizing Emacs via hooks.
2404 @xref{Sample Init File}, for a more complete sample @file{.emacs}
2405 file.
2406
2407 @example
2408 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook ()
2409 ;; my customizations for all of c-mode and related modes
2410 (no-case-fold-search)
2411 )
2412 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook)
2413 @end example
2414
2415 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2416 @node Style Variables, Styles, CC Hooks, Config Basics
2417 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2418 @section Style Variables
2419 @cindex styles
2420 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2421
2422 @cindex style variables
2423 The variables that @ccmode{}'s style system control are called
2424 @dfn{style variables}. Note that style variables are ordinary Lisp
2425 variables, which the style system initializes; you can change their
2426 values at any time (e.g., in a hook function). The style system can
2427 also set other variables, to some extent. @xref{Styles}.
2428
2429 @dfn{Style variables} are handled specially in several ways:
2430
2431 @itemize @bullet
2432 @item
2433 Style variables are by default buffer-local variables. However, they
2434 can instead be made global by setting
2435 @code{c-style-variables-are-local-p} to @code{nil} before @ccmode{} is
2436 initialized.
2437
2438 @item
2439 @vindex c-old-style-variable-behavior
2440 @vindex old-style-variable-behavior (c-)
2441 The default global binding of any style variable (with two exceptions
2442 - see below) is the special symbol @code{set-from-style}. When the
2443 style system initializes a buffer-local copy of a style variable for a
2444 @ccmode{} buffer, if its global binding is still that symbol then it
2445 will be set from the current style. Otherwise it will retain its
2446 global default@footnote{This is a big change from versions of
2447 @ccmode{} earlier than 5.26, where such settings would get overridden
2448 by the style system unless special precautions were taken. That was
2449 changed since it was counterintuitive and confusing, especially to
2450 novice users. If your configuration depends on the old overriding
2451 behavior, you can set the variable
2452 @code{c-old-style-variable-behavior} to non-@code{nil}.}. This
2453 ``otherwise'' happens, for example, when you've set the variable with
2454 @code{setq} at the top level of your @file{.emacs} (@pxref{Config
2455 Basics}).
2456
2457 @item
2458 The style variable @code{c-offsets-alist} (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}) is
2459 an association list with an element for each syntactic symbol. It's
2460 handled a little differently from the other style variables. It's
2461 default global binding is the empty list @code{nil}, rather than
2462 @code{set-from-style}. Before the style system is initialized, you
2463 can add individual elements to @code{c-offsets-alist} by calling
2464 @code{c-set-offset} (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}) just like you would set
2465 other style variables with @code{setq}. Those elements will then
2466 prevail when the style system later initializes a buffer-local copy of
2467 @code{c-offsets-alist}.
2468
2469 @item
2470 The style variable @code{c-special-indent-hook} is also handled in a
2471 special way. Styles can only add functions to this hook, not remove
2472 them, so any global settings you put on it are always
2473 preserved@footnote{This did not change in version 5.26.}. The value
2474 you give this variable in a style definition can be either a function
2475 or a list of functions.
2476
2477 @item
2478 The global bindings of the style variables get captured in the special
2479 @code{user} style when the style system is first initialized.
2480 @xref{Built-in Styles}, for details.
2481 @end itemize
2482
2483 The style variables are:@*
2484 @code{c-indent-comment-alist},
2485 @code{c-indent-comments-syntactically-p} (@pxref{Indentation
2486 Commands});@*
2487 @code{c-doc-comment-style} (@pxref{Doc Comments});@*
2488 @code{c-block-comment-prefix}, @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp}
2489 (@pxref{Custom Filling and Breaking});@*
2490 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist} (@pxref{Hanging Braces});@*
2491 @code{c-hanging-colons-alist} (@pxref{Hanging Colons});@*
2492 @code{c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria} (@pxref{Hanging Semicolons and
2493 Commas});@*
2494 @code{c-cleanup-list} (@pxref{Clean-ups});@*
2495 @code{c-basic-offset} (@pxref{Customizing Indentation});@*
2496 @code{c-offsets-alist} (@pxref{c-offsets-alist});@*
2497 @code{c-comment-only-line-offset} (@pxref{Comment Line-Up});@*
2498 @code{c-special-indent-hook}, @code{c-label-minimum-indentation}
2499 (@pxref{Other Indentation});@*
2500 @code{c-backslash-column}, @code{c-backslash-max-column}
2501 (@pxref{Custom Macros}).
2502
2503 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2504 @node Styles, , Style Variables, Config Basics
2505 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2506 @section Styles
2507 @cindex styles
2508 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2509
2510 By @dfn{style} we mean the layout of the code---things like how many
2511 columns to indent a block of code, whether an opening brace gets
2512 indented to the level of the code it encloses, or of the construct
2513 that introduces it, or ``hangs'' at the end of a line.
2514
2515 Most people only need to edit code formatted in just a few well-defined
2516 and consistent styles. For example, their organization might impose a
2517 ``blessed'' style that all its programmers must conform to. Similarly,
2518 people who work on GNU software will have to use the GNU coding style.
2519 Some shops are more lenient, allowing a variety of coding styles, and as
2520 programmers come and go, there could be a number of styles in use. For
2521 this reason, @ccmode{} makes it convenient for you to set up logical
2522 groupings of customizations called @dfn{styles}, associate a single name
2523 for any particular style, and pretty easily start editing new or
2524 existing code using these styles.
2525
2526 As an alternative to writing a style definition yourself, you can have
2527 @ccmode{} @dfn{guess} (at least part of) your style by looking at an
2528 already formatted piece of your code, @ref{Guessing the Style}.
2529
2530 @menu
2531 * Built-in Styles::
2532 * Choosing a Style::
2533 * Adding Styles::
2534 * Guessing the Style::
2535 * File Styles::
2536 @end menu
2537
2538 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2539 @node Built-in Styles, Choosing a Style, Styles, Styles
2540 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2541 @subsection Built-in Styles
2542 @cindex styles, built-in
2543 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2544
2545 If you're lucky, one of @ccmode{}'s built-in styles might be just
2546 what you're looking for. These are:
2547
2548 @table @code
2549 @item gnu
2550 @cindex GNU style
2551 Coding style blessed by the Free Software Foundation
2552 for C code in GNU programs.
2553
2554 @item k&r
2555 @cindex K&R style
2556 The classic Kernighan and Ritchie style for C code.
2557
2558 @item bsd
2559 @cindex BSD style
2560 Also known as ``Allman style'' after Eric Allman.
2561
2562 @item whitesmith
2563 @cindex Whitesmith style
2564 Popularized by the examples that came with Whitesmiths C, an early
2565 commercial C compiler.
2566
2567 @item stroustrup
2568 @cindex Stroustrup style
2569 The classic Stroustrup style for C++ code.
2570
2571 @item ellemtel
2572 @cindex Ellemtel style
2573 Popular C++ coding standards as defined by ``Programming in C++, Rules
2574 and Recommendations,'' Erik Nyquist and Mats Henricson,
2575 Ellemtel@footnote{This document is available at
2576 @uref{http://www.doc.ic.ac.uk/lab/cplus/c++.rules/} among other
2577 places.}.
2578 @c N.B. This URL was still valid at 2005/8/28 (ACM).
2579
2580 @item linux
2581 @cindex Linux style
2582 C coding standard for Linux (the kernel).
2583
2584 @item python
2585 @cindex Python style
2586 C coding standard for Python extension modules@footnote{Python is a
2587 high level scripting language with a C/C++ foreign function interface.
2588 For more information, see @uref{http://www.python.org/}.}.
2589
2590 @item java
2591 @cindex Java style
2592 The style for editing Java code. Note that the default
2593 value for @code{c-default-style} installs this style when you enter
2594 @code{java-mode}.
2595
2596 @item awk
2597 @cindex AWK style
2598 The style for editing AWK code. Note that the default value for
2599 @code{c-default-style} installs this style when you enter
2600 @code{awk-mode}.
2601
2602 @item user
2603 @cindex User style
2604 This is a special style created by you. It consists of the factory
2605 defaults for all the style variables as modified by the customizations
2606 you do either with the Customization interface or by writing
2607 @code{setq}s and @code{c-set-offset}s at the top level of your
2608 @file{.emacs} file (@pxref{Config Basics}). The style system creates
2609 this style as part of its initialization and doesn't modify it
2610 afterwards.
2611 @end table
2612
2613
2614 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2615 @node Choosing a Style, Adding Styles, Built-in Styles, Styles
2616 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2617 @subsection Choosing a Style
2618 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2619
2620 When you create a new buffer, its style will be set from
2621 @code{c-default-style}. The factory default is the style @code{gnu},
2622 except in Java and AWK modes where it's @code{java} and @code{awk}.
2623
2624 Remember that if you set a style variable with the Customization
2625 interface or at the top level of your @file{.emacs} file before the
2626 style system is initialized (@pxref{Config Basics}), this setting will
2627 override the one that the style system would have given the variable.
2628
2629 To set a buffer's style interactively, use the command @kbd{C-c .}
2630 (@pxref{Other Commands}). To set it from a file's local variable
2631 list, @ref{File Styles}.
2632
2633 @defopt c-default-style
2634 @vindex default-style (c-)
2635 This variable specifies which style to install by default in new
2636 buffers. It takes either a style name string, or an association list
2637 of major mode symbols to style names:
2638
2639 @enumerate
2640 @item
2641 When @code{c-default-style} is a string, it must be an existing style
2642 name. This style is then used for all modes.
2643
2644 @item
2645 When @code{c-default-style} is an association list, the mode language
2646 is looked up to find a style name string.
2647
2648 @item
2649 If @code{c-default-style} is an association list where the mode
2650 language mode isn't found then the special symbol @samp{other} is
2651 looked up. If it's found then the associated style is used.
2652
2653 @item
2654 If @samp{other} is not found then the @samp{gnu} style is used.
2655 @end enumerate
2656
2657 In all cases, the style described in @code{c-default-style} is installed
2658 @emph{before} the language hooks are run, so you can always override
2659 this setting by including an explicit call to @code{c-set-style} in your
2660 language mode hook, or in @code{c-mode-common-hook}.
2661
2662 The standard value of @code{c-default-style} is @w{@code{((java-mode
2663 . "java") (awk-mode . "awk") (other . "gnu"))}}.
2664 @end defopt
2665
2666 @defvar c-indentation-style
2667 @vindex indentation-style (c-)
2668 This variable always contains the buffer's current style name, as a
2669 string.
2670 @end defvar
2671
2672 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2673 @node Adding Styles, Guessing the Style, Choosing a Style, Styles
2674 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2675 @subsection Adding and Amending Styles
2676 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2677
2678 If none of the built-in styles is appropriate, you'll probably want to
2679 create a new @dfn{style definition}, possibly based on an existing
2680 style. To do this, put the new style's settings into a list with the
2681 following format; the list can then be passed as an argument to the
2682 function @code{c-add-style}. You can see an example of a style
2683 definition in @ref{Sample Init File}.
2684
2685 @cindex style definition
2686 @c @defvr {List} style definition
2687 @table @asis
2688 @item Structure of a Style Definition List
2689 ([@var{base-style}] [(@var{variable} . @var{value}) @dots{}])
2690
2691 Optional @var{base-style}, if present, must be a string which is the
2692 name of the @dfn{base style} from which this style inherits. At most
2693 one @var{base-style} is allowed in a style definition. If
2694 @var{base-style} is not specified, the style inherits from the table
2695 of factory default values@footnote{This table is stored internally in
2696 the variable c-fallback-style.} instead. All styles eventually
2697 inherit from this internal table. Style loops generate errors. The
2698 list of pre-existing styles can be seen in @ref{Built-in Styles}.
2699
2700 The dotted pairs (@var{variable} . @var{value}) each consist of a
2701 variable and the value it is to be set to when the style is later
2702 activated.@footnote{Note that if the variable has been given a value
2703 by the Customization interface or a @code{setq} at the top level of
2704 your @file{.emacs}, this value will override the one the style system
2705 tries to give it. @xref{Config Basics}.} The variable can be either a
2706 @ccmode{} style variable or an arbitrary Emacs variable. In the
2707 latter case, it is @emph{not} made buffer-local by the @ccmode{} style
2708 system.
2709 @c @end defvr
2710
2711 Two variables are treated specially in the dotted pair list:
2712
2713 @table @code
2714 @item c-offsets-alist
2715 The value is in turn a list of dotted pairs of the form
2716
2717 @example
2718 (@r{@var{syntactic-symbol}} . @r{@var{offset}})
2719 @end example
2720
2721 as described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. These are passed to
2722 @code{c-set-offset} so there is no need to set every syntactic symbol
2723 in your style, only those that are different from the inherited style.
2724
2725 @item c-special-indent-hook
2726 The value is added to @code{c-special-indent-hook} using
2727 @code{add-hook}, so any functions already on it are kept. If the value
2728 is a list, each element of the list is added with @code{add-hook}.
2729 @end table
2730 @end table
2731
2732 Styles are kept in the @code{c-style-alist} variable, but you
2733 should never modify this variable directly. Instead, @ccmode{}
2734 provides the function @code{c-add-style} for this purpose.
2735
2736 @defun c-add-style stylename description &optional set-p
2737 @findex add-style (c-)
2738 Add or update a style called @var{stylename}, a string.
2739 @var{description} is the new style definition in the form described
2740 above. If @var{stylename} already exists in @code{c-style-alist} then
2741 it is replaced by @var{description}. (Note, this replacement is
2742 total. The old style is @emph{not} merged into the new one.)
2743 Otherwise, a new style is added.
2744
2745 If the optional @var{set-p} is non-@code{nil} then the new style is
2746 applied to the current buffer as well. The use of this facility is
2747 deprecated and it might be removed from @ccmode{} in a future release.
2748 You should use @code{c-set-style} instead.
2749
2750 The sample @file{.emacs} file provides a concrete example of how a new
2751 style can be added and automatically set. @xref{Sample Init File}.
2752 @end defun
2753
2754 @defvar c-style-alist
2755 @vindex style-alist (c-)
2756 This is the variable that holds the definitions for the styles. It
2757 should not be changed directly; use @code{c-add-style} instead.
2758 @end defvar
2759
2760 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2761 @node Guessing the Style, File Styles, Adding Styles, Styles
2762 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2763 @subsection Guessing the Style
2764 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2765
2766 Instead of specifying a style, you can get @ccmode{} to @dfn{guess}
2767 your style by examining an already formatted code buffer. @ccmode{}
2768 then determines the ''most frequent'' offset (@pxref{c-offsets-alist})
2769 for each of the syntactic symbols (@pxref{Indentation Engine Basics})
2770 encountered in the buffer, and the ''most frequent'' value of
2771 c-basic-offset (@pxref{Customizing Indentation}), then merges the
2772 current style with these ''guesses'' to form a new style. This
2773 combined style is known as the @dfn{guessed style}.
2774
2775 To do this, call @code{c-guess} (or one of the other 5 guessing
2776 commands) on your sample buffer. The analysis of your code may take
2777 some time.
2778
2779 You can then set the guessed style in any @ccmode{} buffer with
2780 @code{c-guess-install}. You can display the style with
2781 @code{c-guess-view}, and preserve it by copying it into your
2782 @file{.emacs} for future use, preferably after editing it.
2783
2784 @table @asis
2785 @item @kbd{M-x c-guess-no-install}
2786 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-guess-buffer-no-install}
2787 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-guess-region-no-install}
2788 @findex c-guess-no-install
2789 @findex c-guess-buffer-no-install
2790 @findex c-guess-region-no-install
2791 @findex guess-no-install (c-)
2792 @findex guess-buffer-no-install (c-)
2793 @findex guess-region-no-install (c-)
2794 These commands analyze a part of the current buffer and guess the
2795 style from it.
2796
2797 The part of the buffer examined is either the region
2798 (@code{c-guess-region-no-install}), the entire buffer
2799 (@code{c-guess-buffer-no-install}), or the first
2800 @code{c-guess-region-max} bytes (@code{c-guess-no-install}).
2801
2802 Each of these commands can be given an optional prefix argument. This
2803 instructs @ccmode{} to combine the new guesses with the current
2804 guesses before forming the guessed style.
2805 @end table
2806
2807 @table @asis
2808 @item @kbd{M-x c-guess}
2809 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-guess-buffer}
2810 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-guess-region}
2811 @findex c-guess
2812 @findex c-guess-buffer
2813 @findex c-guess-region
2814 @findex guess (c-)
2815 @findex guess-buffer (c-)
2816 @findex guess-region (c-)
2817 These commands analyze a part of the current buffer, guess the style
2818 from it, then install the guessed style on the buffer. The guessed
2819 style is given a name based on the buffer's absolute file name, and
2820 you can then set this style on any @ccmode{} buffer with @kbd{C-c .}.
2821
2822 The part of the buffer examined is either the region
2823 (@code{c-guess-region}), the entire buffer (@code{c-guess-buffer}), or
2824 the first @code{c-guess-region-max} bytes (@code{c-guess}).
2825
2826 Each of these commands can be given an optional prefix argument. This
2827 instructs @ccmode{} to combine the new guesses with the current
2828 guesses before forming the guessed style.
2829 @end table
2830
2831 @defopt c-guess-region-max
2832 @vindex guess-region-max (c-)
2833 This variable, default 50000, is the size in bytes of the buffer
2834 portion examined by c-guess and c-guess-no-install. If set to
2835 @code{nil}, the entire buffer is examined.
2836 @end defopt
2837
2838 @defopt c-guess-offset-threshold
2839 @vindex guess-offset-threshold (c-)
2840 This variable, default 10, is the maximum offset, either outwards or
2841 inwards, which will be taken into account by the analysis process.
2842 Any offset bigger than this will be ignored. For no limit, set this
2843 variable to a large number.
2844 @end defopt
2845
2846 @table @asis
2847 @item @kbd{M-x c-guess-install}
2848 @findex c-guess-install
2849 @findex guess-install (c-)
2850
2851 Set the current buffer's style to the guessed style. This prompts you
2852 to enter an optional new style name to give to the guessed style. By
2853 default, this name is based on the buffer's absolute file name. You
2854 can then use this style like any other.
2855
2856 @item @kbd{M-x c-guess-view}
2857 @findex c-guess-view
2858 @findex guess-view (c-)
2859 Display the most recently guessed style in a temporary buffer. This
2860 display is in the form of a @code{c-add-style} form (@pxref{Adding
2861 Styles}) which can be easily copied to your @file{.emacs}. You will
2862 probably want to edit it first.
2863
2864 The display of the guessed style contains these elements:
2865
2866 @table @asis
2867 @item Placeholder Name
2868 You should replace this with a style name of your own.
2869 @item Parent Style
2870 The style current when the guessing began, from which the guessed
2871 style inherits (@pxref{Config Basics}) the settings which weren't
2872 guessed.
2873 @item Guessed Offsets
2874 These are the core result of the guessing process. Each of them is
2875 marked by a comment.
2876 @item Inherited Offsets
2877 These are syntactic offsets which have been taken over from the parent
2878 style. To avoid possible future conflicts, you should remove either
2879 these offsets or the parent style name.
2880 @end table
2881 @end table
2882
2883 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2884 @node File Styles, , Guessing the Style, Styles
2885 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2886 @subsection File Styles
2887 @cindex styles, file local
2888 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2889
2890 @cindex file local variables
2891
2892 The Emacs manual describes how you can customize certain variables on a
2893 per-file basis by including a @dfn{file local variable} block at the end
2894 of the file (@pxref{File Variables,, Local Variables in Files,@emacsman{},
2895 @emacsmantitle{}}).
2896
2897 So far, you've only seen a functional interface for setting styles in
2898 @ccmode{}, and this can't be used here. @ccmode{} fills the gap by
2899 providing two variables for use in a file's local variable list.
2900 Don't use them anywhere else! These allow you to customize the style
2901 on a per-file basis:
2902
2903 @defvar c-file-style
2904 @vindex file-style (c-)
2905 Set this variable to a style name string in the Local Variables list.
2906 From now on, when you visit the file, @ccmode{} will automatically set
2907 the file's style to this one using @code{c-set-style}.
2908 @end defvar
2909
2910 @defvar c-file-offsets
2911 @vindex file-offsets (c-)
2912 Set this variable (in the Local Variables list) to an association list
2913 of the same format as @code{c-offsets-alist}. From now on, when you
2914 visit the file, @ccmode{} will automatically institute these offsets
2915 using @code{c-set-offset}.
2916 @end defvar
2917
2918 Note that file style settings (i.e., @code{c-file-style}) are applied
2919 before file offset settings
2920 (i.e., @code{c-file-offsets})@footnote{Also, if either of these are set
2921 in a file's local variable section, all the style variable values are
2922 made local to that buffer, even if
2923 @code{c-style-variables-are-local-p} is @code{nil}. Since this
2924 variable is virtually always non-@code{nil} anyhow, you're unlikely to
2925 notice this effect.}.
2926
2927 If you set any variable by the file local variables mechanism, that
2928 setting takes priority over all other settings, even those in your
2929 mode hooks (@pxref{CC Hooks}). Any individual setting of a variable
2930 will override one made through @code{c-file-style} or
2931 @code{c-file-offsets}.
2932 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2933 @node Custom Filling and Breaking, Custom Auto-newlines, Config Basics, Top
2934 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2935 @chapter Customizing Filling and Line Breaking
2936 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2937
2938 Since there's a lot of normal text in comments and string literals,
2939 @ccmode{} provides features to edit these like in text mode. It does
2940 this by hooking in on the different line breaking functions and tuning
2941 relevant variables as necessary.
2942
2943 @vindex c-comment-prefix-regexp
2944 @vindex comment-prefix-regexp (c-)
2945 @cindex comment line prefix
2946 @vindex comment-start
2947 @vindex comment-end
2948 @vindex comment-start-skip
2949 @vindex paragraph-start
2950 @vindex paragraph-separate
2951 @vindex paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix
2952 @vindex adaptive-fill-mode
2953 @vindex adaptive-fill-regexp
2954 @vindex adaptive-fill-first-line-regexp
2955 To make Emacs recognize comments and treat text in them as normal
2956 paragraphs, @ccmode{} makes several standard
2957 variables@footnote{@code{comment-start}, @code{comment-end},
2958 @code{comment-start-skip}, @code{paragraph-start},
2959 @code{paragraph-separate}, @code{paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix},
2960 @code{adaptive-fill-mode}, @code{adaptive-fill-regexp}, and
2961 @code{adaptive-fill-first-line-regexp}.} buffer-local and modifies them
2962 according to the language syntax and the comment line prefix.
2963
2964 @defopt c-comment-prefix-regexp
2965 @vindex comment-prefix-regexp (c-)
2966 This style variable contains the regexp used to recognize the
2967 @dfn{comment line prefix}, which is the line decoration that starts
2968 every line in a comment. The variable is either the comment line
2969 prefix itself, or (more usually) an association list with different
2970 values for different languages. The symbol for the major mode is
2971 looked up in the alist to get the regexp for the language, and if it
2972 isn't found then the special symbol @samp{other} is looked up instead.
2973
2974 When a comment line gets divided by @kbd{M-j} or the like, @ccmode{}
2975 inserts the comment line prefix from a neighboring line at the start
2976 of the new line. The default value of c-comment-prefix-regexp is
2977 @samp{//+\\|\\**}, which matches C++ style line comments like
2978
2979 @example
2980 // blah blah
2981 @end example
2982
2983 @noindent
2984 with two or more slashes in front of them, and the second and
2985 subsequent lines of C style block comments like
2986
2987 @example
2988 @group
2989 /*
2990 * blah blah
2991 */
2992 @end group
2993 @end example
2994
2995 @noindent
2996 with zero or more stars at the beginning of every line. If you change
2997 this variable, please make sure it still matches the comment starter
2998 (i.e., @code{//}) of line comments @emph{and} the line prefix inside
2999 block comments.
3000
3001 @findex c-setup-paragraph-variables
3002 @findex setup-paragraph-variables (c-)
3003 Also note that since @ccmode{} uses the value of
3004 @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} to set up several other variables at
3005 mode initialization, there won't be any effect if you just change it
3006 inside a @ccmode{} buffer. You need to call the command
3007 @code{c-setup-paragraph-variables} too, to update those other
3008 variables. That's also the case if you modify
3009 @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} in a mode hook, since @ccmode{} will
3010 already have set up these variables before calling the hook.
3011 @end defopt
3012
3013 In comments, @ccmode{} uses @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} to adapt
3014 the line prefix from the other lines in the comment.
3015
3016 @vindex adaptive-fill-mode
3017 @cindex Adaptive Fill mode
3018 @ccmode{} uses adaptive fill mode (@pxref{Adaptive Fill,,, emacs, GNU
3019 Emacs Manual}) to make Emacs correctly keep the line prefix when
3020 filling paragraphs. That also makes Emacs preserve the text
3021 indentation @emph{inside} the comment line prefix. E.g., in the
3022 following comment, both paragraphs will be filled with the left
3023 margins of the texts kept intact:
3024
3025 @example
3026 @group
3027 /* Make a balanced b-tree of the nodes in the incoming
3028 * stream. But, to quote the famous words of Donald E.
3029 * Knuth,
3030 *
3031 * Beware of bugs in the above code; I have only
3032 * proved it correct, not tried it.
3033 */
3034 @end group
3035 @end example
3036
3037 @findex c-setup-filladapt
3038 @findex setup-filladapt (c-)
3039 @findex filladapt-mode
3040 @vindex filladapt-mode
3041 @cindex Filladapt mode
3042 It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages, notably Kyle
3043 E. Jones' Filladapt package@footnote{It's available from
3044 @uref{http://www.wonderworks.com/}. As of version 2.12, it does however
3045 lack a feature that makes it work suboptimally when
3046 @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} matches the empty string (which it does
3047 by default). A patch for that is available from
3048 @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net/,, the CC Mode web site}.},
3049 @c 2005/11/22: The above is still believed to be the case.
3050 which handles things like bulleted lists nicely. There's a convenience
3051 function @code{c-setup-filladapt} that tunes the relevant variables in
3052 Filladapt for use in @ccmode{}. Call it from a mode hook, e.g., with
3053 something like this in your @file{.emacs}:
3054
3055 @example
3056 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook ()
3057 (c-setup-filladapt)
3058 (filladapt-mode 1))
3059 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook)
3060 @end example
3061
3062 @defopt c-block-comment-prefix
3063 @vindex block-comment-prefix (c-)
3064 @vindex c-comment-continuation-stars
3065 @vindex comment-continuation-stars (c-)
3066 Normally the comment line prefix inserted for a new line inside a
3067 comment is deduced from other lines in it. However there's one
3068 situation when there's no hint about what the prefix should look like,
3069 namely when a block comment is broken for the first time. This style
3070 variable@footnote{In versions before 5.26, this variable was called
3071 @code{c-comment-continuation-stars}. As a compatibility measure,
3072 @ccmode{} still uses the value on that variable if it's set.} is used
3073 then as the comment prefix. It defaults to @samp{*
3074 }@footnote{Actually, this default setting of
3075 @code{c-block-comment-prefix} typically gets overridden by the default
3076 style @code{gnu}, which sets it to blank. You can see the line
3077 splitting effect described here by setting a different style,
3078 e.g., @code{k&r} @xref{Choosing a Style}.}, which makes a comment
3079
3080 @example
3081 /* Got O(n^2) here, which is a Bad Thing. */
3082 @end example
3083
3084 @noindent
3085 break into
3086
3087 @example
3088 @group
3089 /* Got O(n^2) here, which
3090 * is a Bad Thing. */
3091 @end group
3092 @end example
3093
3094 Note that it won't work to adjust the indentation by putting leading
3095 spaces in @code{c-block-comment-prefix}, since @ccmode{} still uses the
3096 normal indentation engine to indent the line. Thus, the right way to
3097 fix the indentation is by customizing the @code{c} syntactic symbol. It
3098 defaults to @code{c-lineup-C-comments}, which handles the indentation of
3099 most common comment styles, see @ref{Line-Up Functions}.
3100 @end defopt
3101
3102 @defopt c-ignore-auto-fill
3103 @vindex ignore-auto-fill (c-)
3104 When auto fill mode is enabled, @ccmode{} can selectively ignore it
3105 depending on the context the line break would occur in, e.g., to never
3106 break a line automatically inside a string literal. This variable
3107 takes a list of symbols for the different contexts where auto-filling
3108 never should occur:
3109
3110 @table @code
3111 @item string
3112 Inside a string or character literal.
3113 @item c
3114 Inside a C style block comment.
3115 @item c++
3116 Inside a C++ style line comment.
3117 @item cpp
3118 Inside a preprocessor directive.
3119 @item code
3120 Anywhere else, i.e., in normal code.
3121 @end table
3122
3123 By default, @code{c-ignore-auto-fill} is set to @code{(string cpp
3124 code)}, which means that when auto-fill mode is activated,
3125 auto-filling only occurs in comments. In literals, it's often
3126 desirable to have explicit control over newlines. In preprocessor
3127 directives, the necessary @samp{\} escape character before the newline
3128 is not automatically inserted, so an automatic line break would
3129 produce invalid code. In normal code, line breaks are normally
3130 dictated by some logical structure in the code rather than the last
3131 whitespace character, so automatic line breaks there will produce poor
3132 results in the current implementation.
3133 @end defopt
3134
3135 @vindex comment-multi-line
3136 If inside a comment and @code{comment-multi-line} (@pxref{Auto
3137 Fill,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}} is non-@code{nil}, the
3138 indentation and
3139 line prefix are preserved. If inside a comment and
3140 @code{comment-multi-line} is @code{nil}, a new comment of the same
3141 type is started on the next line and indented as appropriate for
3142 comments.
3143
3144 Note that @ccmode{} sets @code{comment-multi-line} to @code{t} at
3145 startup. The reason is that @kbd{M-j} could otherwise produce sequences
3146 of single line block comments for texts that should logically be treated
3147 as one comment, and the rest of the paragraph handling code
3148 (e.g., @kbd{M-q} and @kbd{M-a}) can't cope with that, which would lead to
3149 inconsistent behavior.
3150
3151 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3152 @node Custom Auto-newlines, Clean-ups, Custom Filling and Breaking, Top
3153 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3154 @chapter Customizing Auto-newlines
3155 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3156
3157 @ccmode{} determines whether to insert auto-newlines in two basically
3158 different ways, depending on the character just typed:
3159
3160 @table @asis
3161 @item Braces and Colons
3162 @ccmode{} first determines the syntactic context of the brace or colon
3163 (@pxref{Syntactic Symbols}), then looks for a corresponding element in
3164 an alist. This element specifies where to put newlines: this is any
3165 combination of before and after the brace or colon. If no alist
3166 element is found, newlines are inserted both before and after a brace,
3167 but none are inserted around a colon. See @ref{Hanging Braces} and
3168 @ref{Hanging Colons}.
3169
3170 @item Semicolons and Commas
3171 The variable @code{c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria} contains a list of
3172 functions which determine whether to insert a newline after a newly
3173 typed semicolon or comma. @xref{Hanging Semicolons and Commas}.
3174 @end table
3175
3176 The names of these configuration variables contain @samp{hanging}
3177 because they let you @dfn{hang} the pertinent characters. A character
3178 which introduces a C construct is said to @dfn{hang on the right} when
3179 it appears at the end of a line after other code, being separated by a
3180 line break from the construct it introduces, like the opening brace in:
3181
3182 @example
3183 @group
3184 while (i < MAX) @{
3185 total += entry[i];
3186 entry [i++] = 0;
3187 @}
3188 @end group
3189 @end example
3190
3191 @noindent
3192 A character @dfn{hangs on the left} when it appears at the start of
3193 the line after the construct it closes off, like the above closing
3194 brace.
3195
3196 The next chapter, ``Clean-ups'', describes how to configure @ccmode{}
3197 to remove these automatically added newlines in certain specific
3198 circumstances. @xref{Clean-ups}.
3199
3200 @menu
3201 * Hanging Braces::
3202 * Hanging Colons::
3203 * Hanging Semicolons and Commas::
3204 @end menu
3205
3206
3207 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3208 @node Hanging Braces, Hanging Colons, Custom Auto-newlines, Custom Auto-newlines
3209 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3210 @section Hanging Braces
3211 @cindex hanging braces
3212 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3213
3214 To specify which kinds of braces you want auto-newlines put around,
3215 you set the style variable @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}. Its
3216 structure and semantics are described in this section. Details of how
3217 to set it up, and its relationship to CC Mode's style system are given
3218 in @ref{Style Variables}.
3219
3220 Say you wanted an auto-newline after (but not before) the following
3221 @samp{@{}:
3222
3223 @example
3224 if (foo < 17) @{
3225 @end example
3226
3227 @noindent
3228 First you need to find the @dfn{syntactic context} of the brace---type
3229 a @key{RET} before the brace to get it on a line of its
3230 own@footnote{Also insert a @samp{\} at the end of the previous line if
3231 you're in AWK Mode.}, then type @kbd{C-c C-s}. That will tell you
3232 something like:
3233
3234 @example
3235 ((substatement-open 1061))
3236 @end example
3237
3238 @noindent
3239 So here you need to put the entry @code{(substatement-open . (after))}
3240 into @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}.
3241
3242 If you don't want any auto-newlines for a particular syntactic symbol,
3243 put this into @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}:
3244
3245 @example
3246 (brace-entry-open)
3247 @end example
3248
3249 If some brace syntactic symbol is not in @code{c-hanging-brace-alist},
3250 its entry is taken by default as @code{(before after)}---insert a
3251 newline both before and after the brace. In place of a
3252 ``before/after'' list you can specify a function in this alist---this
3253 is useful when the auto newlines depend on the code around the brace.
3254
3255 @defopt c-hanging-braces-alist
3256 @vindex hanging-braces-alist (c-)
3257
3258 This variable is an association list which maps syntactic symbols to
3259 lists of places to insert a newline. @xref{Association
3260 Lists,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}. The key of each element is the
3261 syntactic symbol, the associated value is either @code{nil}, a list,
3262 or a function.
3263
3264 @table @asis
3265 @item The Key: the syntactic symbol
3266 The syntactic symbols that are useful as keys in this list are
3267 @code{brace-list-intro}, @code{statement-cont},
3268 @code{inexpr-class-open}, @code{inexpr-class-close}, and all the
3269 @code{*-open} and @code{*-close} symbols. @xref{Syntactic Symbols},
3270 for a more detailed description of these syntactic symbols, except for
3271 @code{inexpr-class-open} and @code{inexpr-class-close}, which aren't
3272 actual syntactic symbols. Elements with any other value as a key get
3273 ignored.
3274
3275 The braces of anonymous inner classes in Java are given the special
3276 symbols @code{inexpr-class-open} and @code{inexpr-class-close}, so that
3277 they can be distinguished from the braces of normal classes@footnote{The
3278 braces of anonymous classes produce a combination of
3279 @code{inexpr-class}, and @code{class-open} or @code{class-close} in
3280 normal indentation analysis.}.
3281
3282 Note that the aggregate constructs in Pike mode, @samp{(@{}, @samp{@})},
3283 @samp{([}, @samp{])}, and @samp{(<}, @samp{>)}, do not count as brace
3284 lists in this regard, even though they do for normal indentation
3285 purposes. It's currently not possible to set automatic newlines on
3286 these constructs.
3287
3288 @item The associated value: the ``ACTION'' list or function
3289 The value associated with each syntactic symbol in this association
3290 list is called an @var{action}, which can be either a list or a
3291 function which returns a list. @xref{Custom Braces}, for how to use
3292 a function as a brace hanging @var{action}.
3293
3294 The list @var{action} (or the list returned by @var{action} when it's
3295 a function) contains some combination of the symbols @code{before} and
3296 @code{after}, directing @ccmode{} where to put newlines in
3297 relationship to the brace being inserted. Thus, if the list contains
3298 only the symbol @code{after}, then the brace hangs on the right side
3299 of the line, as in:
3300
3301 @example
3302 // here, open braces always 'hang'
3303 void spam( int i ) @{
3304 if( i == 7 ) @{
3305 dosomething(i);
3306 @}
3307 @}
3308 @end example
3309
3310 When the list contains both @code{after} and @code{before}, the braces
3311 will appear on a line by themselves, as shown by the close braces in
3312 the above example. The list can also be empty, in which case newlines
3313 are added neither before nor after the brace.
3314 @end table
3315
3316 If a syntactic symbol is missing entirely from
3317 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}, it's treated in the same way as an
3318 @var{action} with a list containing @code{before} and @code{after}, so
3319 that braces by default end up on their own line.
3320
3321 For example, the default value of @code{c-hanging-braces-alist} is:
3322
3323 @example
3324 ((brace-list-open)
3325 (brace-entry-open)
3326 (statement-cont)
3327 (substatement-open after)
3328 (block-close . c-snug-do-while)
3329 (extern-lang-open after)
3330 (namespace-open after)
3331 (module-open after)
3332 (composition-open after)
3333 (inexpr-class-open after)
3334 (inexpr-class-close before))
3335 @end example
3336
3337 @noindent which says that @code{brace-list-open},
3338 @code{brace-entry-open} and @code{statement-cont}@footnote{Brace lists
3339 inside statements, such as initializers for static array variables
3340 inside functions in C, are recognized as @code{statement-cont}. All
3341 normal substatement blocks are recognized with other symbols.} braces
3342 should both hang on the right side and allow subsequent text to follow
3343 on the same line as the brace. Also, @code{substatement-open},
3344 @code{extern-lang-open}, and @code{inexpr-class-open} braces should hang
3345 on the right side, but subsequent text should follow on the next line.
3346 The opposite holds for @code{inexpr-class-close} braces; they won't
3347 hang, but the following text continues on the same line. Here, in the
3348 @code{block-close} entry, you also see an example of using a function as
3349 an @var{action}. In all other cases, braces are put on a line by
3350 themselves.
3351 @end defopt
3352
3353 @menu
3354 * Custom Braces::
3355 @end menu
3356
3357 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3358 @node Custom Braces, , Hanging Braces, Hanging Braces
3359 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3360 @subsection Custom Brace Hanging
3361 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3362
3363 @vindex c-hanging-braces-alist
3364 @vindex hanging-braces-alist (c-)
3365 @cindex action functions
3366 Syntactic symbols aren't the only place where you can customize
3367 @ccmode{} with the lisp equivalent of callback functions. Remember
3368 that @var{action}s are usually a list containing some combination of
3369 the symbols @code{before} and @code{after} (@pxref{Hanging Braces}).
3370 For more flexibility, you can instead specify brace ``hanginess'' by
3371 giving a syntactic symbol an @dfn{action function} in
3372 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}; this function determines the
3373 ``hanginess'' of a brace, usually by looking at the code near it.
3374
3375 @cindex customization, brace hanging
3376 An action function is called with two arguments: the syntactic symbol
3377 for the brace (e.g., @code{substatement-open}), and the buffer position
3378 where the brace has been inserted. Point is undefined on entry to an
3379 action function, but the function must preserve it (e.g., by using
3380 @code{save-excursion}). The return value should be a list containing
3381 some combination of @code{before} and @code{after}, including neither
3382 of them (i.e., @code{nil}).
3383
3384 @defvar c-syntactic-context
3385 @vindex syntactic-context (c-)
3386 During the call to the indentation or brace hanging @var{action}
3387 function, this variable is bound to the full syntactic analysis list.
3388 This might be, for example, @samp{((block-close 73))}. Don't ever
3389 give @code{c-syntactic-context} a value yourself---this would disrupt
3390 the proper functioning of @ccmode{}.
3391
3392 This variable is also bound in three other circumstances:
3393 (i)@w{ }when calling a c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria function
3394 (@pxref{Hanging Semicolons and Commas}); (ii)@w{ }when calling a
3395 line-up function (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}); (iii)@w{ }when calling a
3396 c-special-indent-hook function (@pxref{Other Indentation}).
3397 @end defvar
3398
3399 As an example, @ccmode{} itself uses this feature to dynamically
3400 determine the hanginess of braces which close ``do-while''
3401 constructs:
3402
3403 @example
3404 void do_list( int count, char** atleast_one_string )
3405 @{
3406 int i=0;
3407 do @{
3408 handle_string( atleast_one_string[i] );
3409 i++;
3410 @} while( i < count );
3411 @}
3412 @end example
3413
3414 @ccmode{} assigns the @code{block-close} syntactic symbol to the
3415 brace that closes the @code{do} construct, and normally we'd like the
3416 line that follows a @code{block-close} brace to begin on a separate
3417 line. However, with ``do-while'' constructs, we want the
3418 @code{while} clause to follow the closing brace. To do this, we
3419 associate the @code{block-close} symbol with the @var{action} function
3420 @code{c-snug-do-while}:
3421
3422 @example
3423 (defun c-snug-do-while (syntax pos)
3424 "Dynamically calculate brace hanginess for do-while statements."
3425 (save-excursion
3426 (let (langelem)
3427 (if (and (eq syntax 'block-close)
3428 (setq langelem (assq 'block-close c-syntactic-context))
3429 (progn (goto-char (cdr langelem))
3430 (if (= (following-char) ?@{)
3431 (forward-sexp -1))
3432 (looking-at "\\<do\\>[^_]")))
3433 '(before)
3434 '(before after)))))
3435 @end example
3436
3437 @findex c-snug-do-while
3438 @findex snug-do-while (c-)
3439 This function simply looks to see if the brace closes a ``do-while''
3440 clause and if so, returns the list @samp{(before)} indicating
3441 that a newline should be inserted before the brace, but not after it.
3442 In all other cases, it returns the list @samp{(before after)} so
3443 that the brace appears on a line by itself.
3444
3445 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3446 @node Hanging Colons, Hanging Semicolons and Commas, Hanging Braces, Custom Auto-newlines
3447 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3448 @section Hanging Colons
3449 @cindex hanging colons
3450 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3451
3452 @cindex customization, colon hanging
3453 @vindex c-hanging-colons-alist
3454 @vindex hanging-colons-alist (c-)
3455
3456 Using a mechanism similar to brace hanging (@pxref{Hanging Braces}),
3457 colons can also be made to hang using the style variable
3458 @code{c-hanging-colons-alist}: when a colon is typed, @ccmode
3459 determines its syntactic context, looks this up in the alist
3460 @code{c-changing-colons-alist} and inserts up to two newlines
3461 accordingly. Here, however, If @ccmode fails to find an entry for a
3462 syntactic symbol in the alist, no newlines are inserted around the
3463 newly typed colon.
3464
3465 @defopt c-hanging-colons-alist
3466 @vindex hanging-colons-alist (c-)
3467
3468 @table @asis
3469 @item The Key: the syntactic symbol
3470 The syntactic symbols appropriate as keys in this association list
3471 are: @code{case-label}, @code{label}, @code{access-label},
3472 @code{member-init-intro}, and @code{inher-intro}. @xref{Syntactic
3473 Symbols}. Elements with any other value as a key get ignored.
3474
3475 @item The associated value: the ``ACTION'' list
3476 The @var{action} here is simply a list containing a combination of the
3477 symbols @code{before} and @code{after}. Unlike in
3478 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}, functions as @var{actions} are not
3479 supported; there doesn't seem to be any need for them.
3480 @end table
3481 @end defopt
3482
3483 In C++, double-colons are used as a scope operator but because these
3484 colons always appear right next to each other, newlines before and after
3485 them are controlled by a different mechanism, called @dfn{clean-ups} in
3486 @ccmode{}. @xref{Clean-ups}, for details.
3487
3488 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3489 @node Hanging Semicolons and Commas, , Hanging Colons, Custom Auto-newlines
3490 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3491 @section Hanging Semicolons and Commas
3492 @cindex hanging semicolons
3493 @cindex hanging commas
3494 @cindex customization, semicolon newlines
3495 @cindex customization, comma newlines
3496 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3497
3498 @defopt c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria
3499 @vindex hanging-semi&comma-criteria (c-)
3500 This style variable takes a list of functions; these get called when
3501 you type a semicolon or comma. The functions are called in order
3502 without arguments. When these functions are entered, point is just
3503 after the newly inserted @samp{;} or @samp{,} and they must preserve
3504 point (e.g., by using @code{save-excursion}). During the call, the
3505 variable @code{c-syntactic-context} is bound to the syntactic context
3506 of the current line@footnote{This was first introduced in @ccmode{}
3507 5.31.} @pxref{Custom Braces}. These functions don't insert newlines
3508 themselves, rather they direct @ccmode{} whether or not to do so.
3509 They should return one of the following values:
3510
3511 @table @code
3512 @item t
3513 A newline is to be inserted after the @samp{;} or @samp{,}, and no
3514 more functions from the list are to be called.
3515 @item stop
3516 No more functions from the list are to be called, and no newline is to
3517 be inserted.
3518 @item nil
3519 No determination has been made, and the next function in the list is
3520 to be called.
3521 @end table
3522
3523 Note that auto-newlines are never inserted @emph{before} a semicolon
3524 or comma. If every function in the list is called without a
3525 determination being made, then no newline is added.
3526
3527 In AWK mode, this variable is set by default to @code{nil}. In the
3528 other modes, the default value is a list containing a single function,
3529 @code{c-semi&comma-inside-parenlist}. This inserts newlines after all
3530 semicolons, apart from those separating @code{for}-clause statements.
3531 @end defopt
3532
3533 @defun c-semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks
3534 @findex semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks (c-)
3535 This is an example of a criteria function, provided by @ccmode{}. It
3536 prevents newlines from being inserted after semicolons when there is a
3537 non-blank following line. Otherwise, it makes no determination. To
3538 use, add this function to the front of the
3539 @code{c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria} list.
3540
3541 @example
3542 (defun c-semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks ()
3543 (save-excursion
3544 (if (and (eq last-command-char ?\;)
3545 (zerop (forward-line 1))
3546 (not (looking-at "^[ \t]*$")))
3547 'stop
3548 nil)))
3549 @end example
3550 @end defun
3551
3552 @defun c-semi&comma-inside-parenlist
3553 @findex semi&comma-inside-parenlist (c-)
3554 @defunx c-semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners
3555 @findex semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners (c-)
3556 The function @code{c-semi&comma-inside-parenlist} is what prevents
3557 newlines from being inserted inside the parenthesis list of @code{for}
3558 statements. In addition to
3559 @code{c-semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks} described above,
3560 @ccmode{} also comes with the criteria function
3561 @code{c-semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners}, which suppresses
3562 newlines after semicolons inside one-line inline method definitions
3563 (e.g., in C++ or Java).
3564 @end defun
3565
3566
3567 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3568 @node Clean-ups, Indentation Engine Basics, Custom Auto-newlines, Top
3569 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3570 @chapter Clean-ups
3571 @cindex clean-ups
3572 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3573
3574 @dfn{Clean-ups} are mechanisms which remove (or exceptionally, add)
3575 whitespace in specific circumstances and are complementary to colon
3576 and brace hanging. You enable a clean-up by adding its symbol into
3577 @code{c-cleanup-list}, e.g., like this:
3578
3579 @example
3580 (add-to-list 'c-cleanup-list 'space-before-funcall)
3581 @end example
3582
3583 On the surface, it would seem that clean-ups overlap the functionality
3584 provided by the @code{c-hanging-*-alist} variables. Clean-ups,
3585 however, are used to adjust code ``after-the-fact'', i.e., to adjust
3586 the whitespace in constructs later than when they were typed.
3587
3588 Most of the clean-ups remove automatically inserted newlines, and are
3589 only active when auto-newline minor mode is turned on. Others will
3590 work all the time. Note that clean-ups are only performed when there
3591 is nothing but whitespace appearing between the individual components
3592 of the construct, and (apart from @code{comment-close-slash}) when the
3593 construct does not occur within a literal (@pxref{Auto-newlines}).
3594
3595 @defopt c-cleanup-list
3596 @vindex cleanup-list (c-)
3597 @cindex literal
3598
3599 You configure @ccmode{}'s clean-ups by setting the style variable
3600 @code{c-cleanup-list}, which is a list of clean-up symbols. By
3601 default, @ccmode{} cleans up only the @code{scope-operator} construct,
3602 which is necessary for proper C++ support.
3603 @end defopt
3604
3605 These are the clean-ups that are only active when electric and
3606 auto-newline minor modes are enabled:
3607
3608 @c TBD: Would like to use some sort of @deffoo here; @table indents a
3609 @c bit too much in dvi output.
3610 @table @code
3611 @item brace-else-brace
3612 Clean up @samp{@} else @{} constructs by placing the entire construct on
3613 a single line. Clean up occurs when the open brace after the
3614 @samp{else} is typed. So for example, this:
3615
3616 @example
3617 @group
3618 void spam(int i)
3619 @{
3620 if( i==7 ) @{
3621 dosomething();
3622 @}
3623 else
3624 @{
3625 @end group
3626 @end example
3627
3628 @noindent
3629 appears like this after the last open brace is typed:
3630
3631 @example
3632 @group
3633 void spam(int i)
3634 @{
3635 if( i==7 ) @{
3636 dosomething();
3637 @} else @{
3638 @end group
3639 @end example
3640
3641 @item brace-elseif-brace
3642 Similar to the @code{brace-else-brace} clean-up, but this cleans up
3643 @samp{@} else if (...) @{} constructs. For example:
3644
3645 @example
3646 @group
3647 void spam(int i)
3648 @{
3649 if( i==7 ) @{
3650 dosomething();
3651 @}
3652 else if( i==3 )
3653 @{
3654 @end group
3655 @end example
3656
3657 @noindent
3658 appears like this after the last open parenthesis is typed:
3659
3660 @example
3661 @group
3662 void spam(int i)
3663 @{
3664 if( i==7 ) @{
3665 dosomething();
3666 @} else if(
3667 @end group
3668 @end example
3669
3670 @noindent
3671 and like this after the last open brace is typed:
3672
3673 @example
3674 @group
3675 void spam(int i)
3676 @{
3677 if( i==7 ) @{
3678 dosomething();
3679 @} else if( i==3 ) @{
3680 @end group
3681 @end example
3682
3683 @item brace-catch-brace
3684 Analogous to @code{brace-elseif-brace}, but cleans up @samp{@} catch
3685 (...) @{} in C++ and Java mode.
3686
3687 @item empty-defun-braces
3688 Clean up braces following a top-level function or class definition that
3689 contains no body. Clean up occurs when the closing brace is typed.
3690 Thus the following:
3691
3692 @example
3693 @group
3694 class Spam
3695 @{
3696 @}
3697 @end group
3698 @end example
3699
3700 @noindent
3701 is transformed into this when the close brace is typed:
3702
3703 @example
3704 @group
3705 class Spam
3706 @{@}
3707 @end group
3708 @end example
3709
3710 @item defun-close-semi
3711 Clean up the terminating semicolon on top-level function or class
3712 definitions when they follow a close brace. Clean up occurs when the
3713 semicolon is typed. So for example, the following:
3714
3715 @example
3716 @group
3717 class Spam
3718 @{
3719 ...
3720 @}
3721 ;
3722 @end group
3723 @end example
3724
3725 @noindent
3726 is transformed into this when the semicolon is typed:
3727
3728 @example
3729 @group
3730 class Spam
3731 @{
3732 ...
3733 @};
3734 @end group
3735 @end example
3736
3737 @item list-close-comma
3738 Clean up commas following braces in array and aggregate initializers.
3739 Clean up occurs when the comma is typed. The space before the comma
3740 is zapped just like the space before the semicolon in
3741 @code{defun-close-semi}.
3742
3743 @item scope-operator
3744 Clean up double colons which might designate a C++ scope operator split
3745 across multiple lines@footnote{Certain C++ constructs introduce
3746 ambiguous situations, so @code{scope-operator} clean-ups might not
3747 always be correct. This usually only occurs when scoped identifiers
3748 appear in switch label tags.}. Clean up occurs when the second colon is
3749 typed. You will always want @code{scope-operator} in the
3750 @code{c-cleanup-list} when you are editing C++ code.
3751
3752 @item one-liner-defun
3753 Clean up a single line of code enclosed by defun braces by removing
3754 the whitespace before and after the code. The clean-up happens when
3755 the closing brace is typed. If the variable
3756 @code{c-max-one-liner-length} is set, the cleanup is only done if the
3757 resulting line would be no longer than the value of that variable.
3758
3759 For example, consider this AWK code:
3760
3761 @example
3762 @group
3763 BEGIN @{
3764 FS = "\t" # use <TAB> as a field separator
3765 @}
3766 @end group
3767 @end example
3768
3769 @noindent
3770 It gets compacted to the following when the closing brace is typed:
3771
3772 @example
3773 @group
3774 BEGIN @{FS = "\t"@} # use <TAB> as a field separator
3775 @end group
3776 @end example
3777
3778 @defopt c-max-one-liner-length
3779 @vindex max-one-liner-length (c-)
3780 The maximum length of the resulting line for which the clean-up
3781 @code{one-liner-defun} will be triggered. This length is that of the entire
3782 line, including any leading whitespace and any trailing comment. Its
3783 default value is 80. If the value is zero or @code{nil}, no limit
3784 applies.
3785 @end defopt
3786 @end table
3787
3788 The following clean-ups are always active when they occur on
3789 @code{c-cleanup-list}, regardless of whether Electric minor mode or
3790 Auto-newline minor mode are enabled:
3791
3792 @table @code
3793 @item space-before-funcall
3794 Insert a space between the function name and the opening parenthesis
3795 of a function call. This produces function calls in the style
3796 mandated by the GNU coding standards, e.g., @samp{signal@w{ }(SIGINT,
3797 SIG_IGN)} and @samp{abort@w{ }()}. Clean up occurs when the opening
3798 parenthesis is typed. This clean-up should never be active in AWK
3799 Mode, since such a space is syntactically invalid for user defined
3800 functions.
3801
3802 @item compact-empty-funcall
3803 Clean up any space between the function name and the opening parenthesis
3804 of a function call that has no arguments. This is typically used
3805 together with @code{space-before-funcall} if you prefer the GNU function
3806 call style for functions with arguments but think it looks ugly when
3807 it's only an empty parenthesis pair. I.e., you will get @samp{signal
3808 (SIGINT, SIG_IGN)}, but @samp{abort()}. Clean up occurs when the
3809 closing parenthesis is typed.
3810
3811 @item comment-close-slash
3812 When inside a block comment, terminate the comment when you type a slash
3813 at the beginning of a line (i.e., immediately after the comment prefix).
3814 This clean-up removes whitespace preceding the slash and if needed,
3815 inserts a star to complete the token @samp{*/}. Type @kbd{C-q /} in this
3816 situation if you just want a literal @samp{/} inserted.
3817 @end table
3818
3819
3820 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3821 @node Indentation Engine Basics, Customizing Indentation, Clean-ups, Top
3822 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3823 @chapter Indentation Engine Basics
3824 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3825
3826 This chapter will briefly cover how @ccmode{} indents lines of code.
3827 It is helpful to understand the indentation model being used so that
3828 you will know how to customize @ccmode{} for your personal coding
3829 style. All the details are in @ref{Customizing Indentation}.
3830
3831 @ccmode{} has an indentation engine that provides a flexible and
3832 general mechanism for customizing indentation. When @ccmode{} indents
3833 a line of code, it separates its calculations into two steps:
3834
3835 @enumerate
3836 @item
3837 @cindex syntactic symbol
3838 @cindex anchor position
3839 It analyzes the line to determine its @dfn{syntactic symbol(s)} (the
3840 kind of language construct it's looking at) and its @dfn{anchor
3841 position} (the position earlier in the file that @ccmode{} will indent
3842 the line relative to). The anchor position might be the location of
3843 an opening brace in the previous line, for example. @xref{Syntactic
3844 Analysis}.
3845 @item
3846 @cindex offsets
3847 @cindex indentation offset specifications
3848 It looks up the syntactic symbol(s) in the configuration to get the
3849 corresponding @dfn{offset(s)}. The symbol @code{+}, which means
3850 ``indent this line one more level'' is a typical offset. @ccmode{}
3851 then applies these offset(s) to the anchor position, giving the
3852 indentation for the line. The different sorts of offsets are
3853 described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}.
3854 @end enumerate
3855
3856 In exceptional circumstances, the syntax directed indentation
3857 described here may be a nuisance rather than a help. You can disable
3858 it by setting @code{c-syntactic-indentation} to @code{nil}. (To set
3859 the variable interactively, @ref{Minor Modes}).
3860
3861 @defopt c-syntactic-indentation
3862 @vindex syntactic-indentation (c-)
3863 When this is non-@code{nil} (which it is by default), the indentation
3864 of code is done according to its syntactic structure. When it's
3865 @code{nil}, every line is just indented to the same level as the
3866 previous one, and @kbd{TAB} (@code{c-indent-command}) adjusts the
3867 indentation in steps of @code{c-basic-offset}. The current style
3868 (@pxref{Config Basics}) then has no effect on indentation, nor do any
3869 of the variables associated with indentation, not even
3870 @code{c-special-indent-hook}.
3871 @end defopt
3872
3873 @menu
3874 * Syntactic Analysis::
3875 * Syntactic Symbols::
3876 * Indentation Calculation::
3877 @end menu
3878
3879
3880 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3881 @node Syntactic Analysis, Syntactic Symbols, Indentation Engine Basics, Indentation Engine Basics
3882 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3883 @section Syntactic Analysis
3884 @cindex syntactic analysis
3885 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3886
3887 @cindex syntactic element
3888 @cindex syntactic context
3889 The first thing @ccmode{} does when indenting a line of code, is to
3890 analyze the line by calling @code{c-guess-basic-syntax}, determining
3891 the syntactic context of the (first) construct on that line. Although
3892 this function is mainly used internally, it can sometimes be useful in
3893 Line-up functions (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}) or in functions on
3894 @code{c-special-indent-hook} (@pxref{Other Indentation}).
3895
3896 @defun c-guess-basic-syntax
3897 @findex guess-basic-syntax (c-)
3898 Determine the syntactic context of the current line.
3899 @end defun
3900
3901 The @dfn{syntactic context} is a list of @dfn{syntactic elements},
3902 where each syntactic element in turn is a list@footnote{In
3903 @ccmode 5.28 and earlier, a syntactic element was a dotted pair; the
3904 cons was the syntactic symbol and the cdr was the anchor position.
3905 For compatibility's sake, the parameter passed to a line-up function
3906 still has this dotted pair form (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}).} Here is a
3907 brief and typical example:
3908
3909 @example
3910 ((defun-block-intro 1959))
3911 @end example
3912
3913 @cindex syntactic symbol
3914 @noindent
3915 The first thing inside each syntactic element is always a
3916 @dfn{syntactic symbol}. It describes the kind of construct that was
3917 recognized, e.g., @code{statement}, @code{substatement},
3918 @code{class-open}, @code{class-close}, etc. @xref{Syntactic Symbols},
3919 for a complete list of currently recognized syntactic symbols and
3920 their semantics. The remaining entries are various data associated
3921 with the recognized construct; there might be zero or more.
3922
3923 @cindex anchor position
3924 Conceptually, a line of code is always indented relative to some
3925 position higher up in the buffer (typically the indentation of the
3926 previous line). That position is the @dfn{anchor position} in the
3927 syntactic element. If there is an entry after the syntactic symbol in
3928 the syntactic element list then it's either @code{nil} or that anchor position.
3929
3930 Here is an example. Suppose we had the following code as the only thing
3931 in a C++ buffer @footnote{The line numbers in this and future examples
3932 don't actually appear in the buffer, of course!}:
3933
3934 @example
3935 1: void swap( int& a, int& b )
3936 2: @{
3937 3: int tmp = a;
3938 4: a = b;
3939 5: b = tmp;
3940 6: @}
3941 @end example
3942
3943 @noindent
3944 We can use @kbd{C-c C-s} (@code{c-show-syntactic-information}) to
3945 report what the syntactic analysis is for the current line:
3946
3947 @table @asis
3948 @item @kbd{C-c C-s} (@code{c-show-syntactic-information})
3949 @kindex C-c C-s
3950 @findex c-show-syntactic-information
3951 @findex show-syntactic-information (c-)
3952 This command calculates the syntactic analysis of the current line and
3953 displays it in the minibuffer. The command also highlights the anchor
3954 position(s).
3955 @end table
3956
3957 Running this command on line 4 of this example, we'd see in the echo
3958 area@footnote{With a universal argument (i.e., @kbd{C-u C-c C-s}) the
3959 analysis is inserted into the buffer as a comment on the current
3960 line.}:
3961
3962 @example
3963 ((statement 35))
3964 @end example
3965
3966 @noindent
3967 and the @samp{i} of @code{int} on line 3 would be highlighted. This
3968 tells us that the line is a statement and it is indented relative to
3969 buffer position 35, the highlighted position. If you were to move
3970 point to line 3 and hit @kbd{C-c C-s}, you would see:
3971
3972 @example
3973 ((defun-block-intro 29))
3974 @end example
3975
3976 @noindent
3977 This indicates that the @samp{int} line is the first statement in a top
3978 level function block, and is indented relative to buffer position 29,
3979 which is the brace just after the function header.
3980
3981 Here's another example:
3982
3983 @example
3984 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
3985 2: @{
3986 3: if( doit )
3987 4: @{
3988 5: return( val + incr );
3989 6: @}
3990 7: return( val );
3991 8: @}
3992 @end example
3993
3994 @noindent
3995 Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 4 gives us:
3996
3997 @example
3998 ((substatement-open 46))
3999 @end example
4000
4001 @cindex substatement
4002 @cindex substatement block
4003 @noindent
4004 which tells us that this is a brace that @emph{opens} a substatement
4005 block.@footnote{A @dfn{substatement} is the line after a
4006 conditional statement, such as @code{if}, @code{else}, @code{while},
4007 @code{do}, @code{switch}, etc. A @dfn{substatement
4008 block} is a brace block following one of these conditional statements.}
4009
4010 @cindex comment-only line
4011 Syntactic contexts can contain more than one element, and syntactic
4012 elements need not have anchor positions. The most common example of
4013 this is a @dfn{comment-only line}:
4014
4015 @example
4016 1: void draw_list( List<Drawables>& drawables )
4017 2: @{
4018 3: // call the virtual draw() method on each element in list
4019 4: for( int i=0; i < drawables.count(), ++i )
4020 5: @{
4021 6: drawables[i].draw();
4022 7: @}
4023 8: @}
4024 @end example
4025
4026 @noindent
4027 Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 3 of this example gives:
4028
4029 @example
4030 ((comment-intro) (defun-block-intro 46))
4031 @end example
4032
4033 @noindent
4034 and you can see that the syntactic context contains two syntactic
4035 elements. Notice that the first element, @samp{(comment-intro)}, has no
4036 anchor position.
4037
4038
4039 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4040 @node Syntactic Symbols, Indentation Calculation, Syntactic Analysis, Indentation Engine Basics
4041 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4042 @section Syntactic Symbols
4043 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4044
4045 @cindex syntactic symbols, brief list
4046 @vindex c-offsets-alist
4047 @vindex offsets-alist (c-)
4048 This section is a complete list of the syntactic symbols which appear
4049 in the @code{c-offsets-alist} style variable, along with brief
4050 descriptions. The previous section (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis})
4051 states what syntactic symbols are and how the indentation engine uses
4052 them.
4053
4054 More detailed descriptions of these symbols, together with snippets of
4055 source code to which they apply, appear in the examples in the
4056 subsections below. Note that, in the interests of brevity, the anchor
4057 position associated with most syntactic symbols is @emph{not}
4058 specified. In cases of doubt, type @kbd{C-c C-s} on a pertinent
4059 line---this highlights the anchor position.
4060
4061 @ssindex -open symbols
4062 @ssindex -close symbols
4063 @ssindex -block-intro symbols
4064 The syntactic symbols which indicate brace constructs follow a general
4065 naming convention. When a line begins with an open or close brace,
4066 its syntactic symbol will contain the suffix @code{-open} or
4067 @code{-close} respectively. The first line within the brace block
4068 construct will contain the suffix @code{-block-intro}.
4069
4070 @ssindex -intro symbols
4071 @ssindex -cont symbols
4072 In constructs which can span several lines, a distinction is usually
4073 made between the first line that introduces the construct and the
4074 lines that continue it. The syntactic symbols that indicate these
4075 lines will contain the suffixes @code{-intro} or @code{-cont}
4076 respectively.
4077
4078 The best way to understand how all this works is by looking at some
4079 examples. Remember that you can see the syntax of any source code
4080 line by using @kbd{C-c C-s}.
4081
4082 @table @code
4083 @item string
4084 Inside a multiline string. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4085 @item c
4086 Inside a multiline C style block comment. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4087 @item defun-open
4088 Brace that opens a top-level function definition. @ref{Function
4089 Symbols}.
4090 @item defun-close
4091 Brace that closes a top-level function definition. @ref{Function
4092 Symbols}.
4093 @item defun-block-intro
4094 The first line in a top-level defun. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4095 @item class-open
4096 Brace that opens a class definition. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4097 @item class-close
4098 Brace that closes a class definition. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4099 @item inline-open
4100 Brace that opens an in-class inline method. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4101 @item inline-close
4102 Brace that closes an in-class inline method. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4103 @item func-decl-cont
4104 The region between a function definition's argument list and the
4105 function opening brace (excluding K&R argument declarations). In C,
4106 you cannot put anything but whitespace and comments in this region,
4107 however in C++ and Java, @code{throws} declarations and other things
4108 can appear here. @ref{Literal Symbols}. @c @emph{FIXME!!! Can it not
4109 @c go somewhere better?}
4110 @item knr-argdecl-intro
4111 First line of a K&R C argument declaration. @ref{K&R Symbols}.
4112 @item knr-argdecl
4113 Subsequent lines in a K&R C argument declaration. @ref{K&R Symbols}.
4114 @item topmost-intro
4115 The first line in a ``topmost'' definition. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4116 @item topmost-intro-cont
4117 Topmost definition continuation lines. This is only used in the parts
4118 that aren't covered by other symbols such as @code{func-decl-cont} and
4119 @code{knr-argdecl}. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4120 @item annotation-top-cont
4121 Topmost definition continuation lines where all previous items are
4122 annotations. @ref{Java Symbols}.
4123 @item member-init-intro
4124 First line in a member initialization list. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4125 @item member-init-cont
4126 Subsequent member initialization list lines. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4127 @item inher-intro
4128 First line of a multiple inheritance list. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4129 @item inher-cont
4130 Subsequent multiple inheritance lines. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4131 @item block-open
4132 Statement block open brace. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4133 @item block-close
4134 Statement block close brace. @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4135 @item brace-list-open
4136 Open brace of an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
4137 @item brace-list-close
4138 Close brace of an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
4139 @item brace-list-intro
4140 First line in an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
4141 @item brace-list-entry
4142 Subsequent lines in an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List
4143 Symbols}.
4144 @item brace-entry-open
4145 Subsequent lines in an enum or static array list where the line begins
4146 with an open brace. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
4147 @item statement
4148 A statement. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4149 @item statement-cont
4150 A continuation of a statement. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4151 @item annotation-var-cont
4152 A continuation of a statement where all previous items are
4153 annotations. @ref{Java Symbols}.
4154 @item statement-block-intro
4155 The first line in a new statement block. @ref{Conditional Construct
4156 Symbols}.
4157 @item statement-case-intro
4158 The first line in a case block. @ref{Switch Statement Symbols}.
4159 @item statement-case-open
4160 The first line in a case block that starts with a brace. @ref{Switch
4161 Statement Symbols}.
4162 @item substatement
4163 The first line after a conditional or loop construct.
4164 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4165 @item substatement-open
4166 The brace that opens a substatement block. @ref{Conditional Construct
4167 Symbols}.
4168 @item substatement-label
4169 The first line after a conditional or loop construct if it's a label.
4170 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4171 @item case-label
4172 A label in a @code{switch} block. @ref{Switch Statement Symbols}.
4173 @item access-label
4174 C++ access control label. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4175 @item label
4176 Any other label. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4177 @item do-while-closure
4178 The @code{while} line that ends a @code{do}-@code{while} construct.
4179 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4180 @item else-clause
4181 The @code{else} line of an @code{if}-@code{else} construct.
4182 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4183 @item catch-clause
4184 The @code{catch} or @code{finally} (in Java) line of a
4185 @code{try}-@code{catch} construct. @ref{Conditional Construct
4186 Symbols}.
4187 @item comment-intro
4188 A line containing only a comment introduction. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4189 @item arglist-intro
4190 The first line in an argument list. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
4191 @item arglist-cont
4192 Subsequent argument list lines when no arguments follow on the same
4193 line as the arglist opening paren. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
4194 @item arglist-cont-nonempty
4195 Subsequent argument list lines when at least one argument follows on
4196 the same line as the arglist opening paren. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
4197 @item arglist-close
4198 The solo close paren of an argument list. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
4199 @item stream-op
4200 Lines continuing a stream operator (C++ only). @ref{Literal
4201 Symbols}. @c @emph{FIXME!!! Can this not be moved somewhere better?}
4202 @item inclass
4203 The line is nested inside a class definition. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4204 @item cpp-macro
4205 The start of a preprocessor macro definition. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4206 @item cpp-define-intro
4207 The first line inside a multiline preprocessor macro if
4208 @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is set. @ref{Multiline Macro
4209 Symbols}.
4210 @item cpp-macro-cont
4211 All lines inside multiline preprocessor macros if
4212 @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is @code{nil}.
4213 @ref{Multiline Macro Symbols}.
4214 @item friend
4215 A C++ friend declaration. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4216 @item objc-method-intro
4217 The first line of an Objective-C method definition. @ref{Objective-C
4218 Method Symbols}.
4219 @item objc-method-args-cont
4220 Lines continuing an Objective-C method definition. @ref{Objective-C
4221 Method Symbols}.
4222 @item objc-method-call-cont
4223 Lines continuing an Objective-C method call. @ref{Objective-C Method
4224 Symbols}.
4225 @item extern-lang-open
4226 Brace that opens an @code{extern} block (e.g., @code{extern "C"
4227 @{...@}}). @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4228 @item extern-lang-close
4229 Brace that closes an @code{extern} block. @ref{External Scope
4230 Symbols}.
4231 @item inextern-lang
4232 Analogous to @code{inclass} syntactic symbol, but used inside
4233 @code{extern} blocks. @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4234 @item namespace-open
4235 @itemx namespace-close
4236 @itemx innamespace
4237 These are analogous to the three @code{extern-lang} symbols above, but
4238 are returned for C++ namespace blocks. @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4239 @item module-open
4240 @itemx module-close
4241 @itemx inmodule
4242 Analogous to the above, but for CORBA IDL @code{module} blocks.
4243 @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4244 @item composition-open
4245 @itemx composition-close
4246 @itemx incomposition
4247 Analogous to the above, but for CORBA CIDL @code{composition} blocks.
4248 @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4249 @item template-args-cont
4250 C++ template argument list continuations. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4251 @item inlambda
4252 Analogous to @code{inclass} syntactic symbol, but used inside lambda
4253 (i.e., anonymous) functions. Only used in Pike mode. @ref{Statement
4254 Block Symbols}.
4255 @item lambda-intro-cont
4256 Lines continuing the header of a lambda function, i.e., between the
4257 @code{lambda} keyword and the function body. Only used in Pike mode.
4258 @ref{Statement Block Symbols}.
4259 @item inexpr-statement
4260 A statement block inside an expression. The gcc C and C++ extension
4261 for this is recognized. It's also used for the special functions that
4262 take a statement block as an argument in Pike. @ref{Statement Block
4263 Symbols}.
4264 @item inexpr-class
4265 A class definition inside an expression. This is used for anonymous
4266 classes in Java. It's also used for anonymous array initializers in
4267 Java. @ref{Java Symbols}.
4268 @end table
4269
4270 @menu
4271 * Function Symbols::
4272 * Class Symbols::
4273 * Conditional Construct Symbols::
4274 * Switch Statement Symbols::
4275 * Brace List Symbols::
4276 * External Scope Symbols::
4277 * Paren List Symbols::
4278 * Literal Symbols::
4279 * Multiline Macro Symbols::
4280 * Objective-C Method Symbols::
4281 * Java Symbols::
4282 * Statement Block Symbols::
4283 * K&R Symbols::
4284 @end menu
4285
4286 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4287 @node Function Symbols, Class Symbols, Syntactic Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4288 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4289 @subsection Function Symbols
4290 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4291
4292 This example shows a typical function declaration.
4293
4294 @example
4295 1: void
4296 2: swap( int& a, int& b )
4297 3: @{
4298 4: int tmp = a;
4299 5: a = b;
4300 6: b = tmp;
4301 7: int ignored =
4302 8: a + b;
4303 9: @}
4304 @end example
4305
4306 @ssindex topmost-intro
4307 @ssindex topmost-intro-cont
4308 @ssindex defun-open
4309 @ssindex defun-close
4310 @ssindex defun-block-intro
4311 Line 1 shows a @code{topmost-intro} since it is the first line that
4312 introduces a top-level construct. Line 2 is a continuation of the
4313 top-level construct introduction so it has the syntax
4314 @code{topmost-intro-cont}. Line 3 shows a @code{defun-open} since it is
4315 the brace that opens a top-level function definition. Line 9 is the
4316 corresponding
4317 @code{defun-close} since it contains the brace that closes the top-level
4318 function definition. Line 4 is a @code{defun-block-intro}, i.e., it is
4319 the first line of a brace-block, enclosed in a
4320 top-level function definition.
4321
4322 @ssindex statement
4323 @ssindex statement-cont
4324 Lines 5, 6, and 7 are all given @code{statement} syntax since there
4325 isn't much special about them. Note however that line 8 is given
4326 @code{statement-cont} syntax since it continues the statement begun
4327 on the previous line.
4328
4329 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4330 @node Class Symbols, Conditional Construct Symbols, Function Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4331 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4332 @subsection Class related Symbols
4333 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4334
4335 Here's an example which illustrates some C++ class syntactic symbols:
4336
4337 @example
4338 1: class Bass
4339 2: : public Guitar,
4340 3: public Amplifiable
4341 4: @{
4342 5: public:
4343 6: Bass()
4344 7: : eString( new BassString( 0.105 )),
4345 8: aString( new BassString( 0.085 )),
4346 9: dString( new BassString( 0.065 )),
4347 10: gString( new BassString( 0.045 ))
4348 11: @{
4349 12: eString.tune( 'E' );
4350 13: aString.tune( 'A' );
4351 14: dString.tune( 'D' );
4352 15: gString.tune( 'G' );
4353 16: @}
4354 17: friend class Luthier;
4355 18: @};
4356 @end example
4357
4358 @ssindex class-open
4359 @ssindex class-close
4360 As in the previous example, line 1 has the @code{topmost-intro} syntax.
4361 Here however, the brace that opens a C++ class definition on line 4 is
4362 assigned the @code{class-open} syntax. Note that in C++, classes,
4363 structs, and unions are essentially equivalent syntactically (and are
4364 very similar semantically), so replacing the @code{class} keyword in the
4365 example above with @code{struct} or @code{union} would still result in a
4366 syntax of @code{class-open} for line 4 @footnote{This is the case even
4367 for C and Objective-C@. For consistency, structs in all supported
4368 languages are syntactically equivalent to classes. Note however that
4369 the keyword @code{class} is meaningless in C and Objective-C.}.
4370 Similarly, line 18 is assigned @code{class-close} syntax.
4371
4372 @ssindex inher-intro
4373 @ssindex inher-cont
4374 Line 2 introduces the inheritance list for the class so it is assigned
4375 the @code{inher-intro} syntax, and line 3, which continues the
4376 inheritance list is given @code{inher-cont} syntax.
4377
4378 @ssindex access-label
4379 @ssindex inclass
4380 Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 5 shows the following analysis:
4381
4382 @example
4383 ((inclass 58) (access-label 58))
4384 @end example
4385
4386 @noindent
4387 The primary syntactic symbol for this line is @code{access-label} as
4388 this is a label keyword that specifies access protection in C++. However,
4389 because this line is also a top-level construct inside a class
4390 definition, the analysis actually shows two syntactic symbols. The
4391 other syntactic symbol assigned to this line is @code{inclass}.
4392 Similarly, line 6 is given both @code{inclass} and @code{topmost-intro}
4393 syntax:
4394
4395 @example
4396 ((inclass 58) (topmost-intro 60))
4397 @end example
4398
4399 @ssindex member-init-intro
4400 @ssindex member-init-cont
4401 Line 7 introduces a C++ member initialization list and as such is given
4402 @code{member-init-intro} syntax. Note that in this case it is
4403 @emph{not} assigned @code{inclass} since this is not considered a
4404 top-level construct. Lines 8 through 10 are all assigned
4405 @code{member-init-cont} since they continue the member initialization
4406 list started on line 7.
4407
4408 @cindex in-class inline methods
4409 @ssindex inline-open
4410 @ssindex inline-close
4411 Line 11's analysis is a bit more complicated:
4412
4413 @example
4414 ((inclass 58) (inline-open))
4415 @end example
4416
4417 This line is assigned a syntax of both @code{inline-open} and
4418 @code{inclass} because it opens an @dfn{in-class} C++ inline method
4419 definition. This is distinct from, but related to, the C++ notion of an
4420 inline function in that its definition occurs inside an enclosing class
4421 definition, which in C++ implies that the function should be inlined.
4422 However, if the definition of the @code{Bass} constructor appeared
4423 outside the class definition, the construct would be given the
4424 @code{defun-open} syntax, even if the keyword @code{inline} appeared
4425 before the method name, as in:
4426
4427 @example
4428 1: class Bass
4429 2: : public Guitar,
4430 3: public Amplifiable
4431 4: @{
4432 5: public:
4433 6: Bass();
4434 7: @};
4435 8:
4436 9: inline
4437 10: Bass::Bass()
4438 11: : eString( new BassString( 0.105 )),
4439 12: aString( new BassString( 0.085 )),
4440 13: dString( new BassString( 0.065 )),
4441 14: gString( new BassString( 0.045 ))
4442 15: @{
4443 16: eString.tune( 'E' );
4444 17: aString.tune( 'A' );
4445 18: dString.tune( 'D' );
4446 19: gString.tune( 'G' );
4447 20: @}
4448 @end example
4449
4450 @ssindex friend
4451 Returning to the previous example, line 16 is given @code{inline-close}
4452 syntax, while line 12 is given @code{defun-block-open} syntax, and lines
4453 13 through 15 are all given @code{statement} syntax. Line 17 is
4454 interesting in that its syntactic analysis list contains three
4455 elements:
4456
4457 @example
4458 ((inclass 58) (topmost-intro 380) (friend))
4459 @end example
4460
4461 The @code{friend} and @code{inline-open} syntactic symbols are
4462 modifiers that do not have anchor positions.
4463
4464 @ssindex template-args-cont
4465 Template definitions introduce yet another syntactic symbol:
4466
4467 @example
4468 1: ThingManager <int,
4469 2: Framework::Callback *,
4470 3: Mutex> framework_callbacks;
4471 @end example
4472
4473 Here, line 1 is analyzed as a @code{topmost-intro}, but lines 2 and 3
4474 are both analyzed as @code{template-args-cont} lines.
4475
4476 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4477 @node Conditional Construct Symbols, Switch Statement Symbols, Class Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4478 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4479 @subsection Conditional Construct Symbols
4480 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4481
4482 Here is a (totally contrived) example which illustrates how syntax is
4483 assigned to various conditional constructs:
4484
4485 @example
4486 1: void spam( int index )
4487 2: @{
4488 3: for( int i=0; i<index; i++ )
4489 4: @{
4490 5: if( i == 10 )
4491 6: do_something_special();
4492 7: else
4493 8: silly_label:
4494 9: do_something( i );
4495 10: @}
4496 11: do @{
4497 12: another_thing( i-- );
4498 13: @}
4499 14: while( i > 0 );
4500 15: @}
4501 @end example
4502
4503 Only the lines that illustrate new syntactic symbols will be discussed.
4504
4505 @ssindex substatement-open
4506 @ssindex statement-block-intro
4507 @ssindex block-close
4508 Line 4 has a brace which opens a conditional's substatement block. It
4509 is thus assigned @code{substatement-open} syntax, and since line 5 is
4510 the first line in the substatement block, it is assigned
4511 @code{statement-block-intro} syntax. Line 10 contains the brace
4512 that closes the inner substatement block, and is therefore given the
4513 syntax @code{block-close}@footnote{@code{block-open} is used only for
4514 ``free-standing'' blocks, and is somewhat rare (@pxref{Literal
4515 Symbols} for an example.)}. Line 13 is treated the same way.
4516
4517 @ssindex substatement
4518 Lines 6 and 9 are also substatements of conditionals, but since they
4519 don't start blocks they are given @code{substatement} syntax
4520 instead of @code{substatement-open}.
4521
4522 @ssindex substatement-label
4523 Line 8 contains a label, which is normally given @code{label} syntax.
4524 This one is however a bit special since it's between a conditional and
4525 its substatement. It's analyzed as @code{substatement-label} to let you
4526 handle this rather odd case differently from normal labels.
4527
4528 @ssindex else-clause
4529 @ssindex catch-clause
4530 Line 7 start with an @code{else} that matches the @code{if} statement on
4531 line 5. It is therefore given the @code{else-clause} syntax and is
4532 anchored on the matching @code{if}. The @code{try}-@code{catch}
4533 constructs in C++ and Java are treated this way too, except that
4534 @code{catch} and (in Java) @code{finally}, are marked with
4535 @code{catch-clause}.
4536
4537 @ssindex do-while-closure
4538 The @code{while} construct on line 14 that closes a @code{do}
4539 conditional is given the special syntax @code{do-while-closure} if it
4540 appears on a line by itself. Note that if the @code{while} appeared on
4541 the same line as the preceding close brace, that line would still have
4542 @code{block-close} syntax.
4543
4544 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4545 @node Switch Statement Symbols, Brace List Symbols, Conditional Construct Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4546 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4547 @subsection Switch Statement Symbols
4548 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4549
4550 Switch statements have their own set of syntactic symbols. Here's an
4551 example:
4552
4553 @example
4554 1: void spam( enum Ingredient i )
4555 2: @{
4556 3: switch( i ) @{
4557 4: case Ham:
4558 5: be_a_pig();
4559 6: break;
4560 7: case Salt:
4561 8: drink_some_water();
4562 9: break;
4563 10: default:
4564 11: @{
4565 12: what_is_it();
4566 13: break;
4567 14: @}
4568 15: @}
4569 14: @}
4570 @end example
4571
4572 @ssindex case-label
4573 @ssindex statement-case-intro
4574 @ssindex statement-case-open
4575 Here, lines 4, 7, and 10 are all assigned @code{case-label} syntax,
4576 while lines 5 and 8 are assigned @code{statement-case-intro}. Line 11
4577 is treated slightly differently since it contains a brace that opens a
4578 block; it is given @code{statement-case-open} syntax.
4579
4580 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4581 @node Brace List Symbols, External Scope Symbols, Switch Statement Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4582 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4583 @subsection Brace List Symbols
4584 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4585
4586 @cindex brace lists
4587 There are a set of syntactic symbols that are used to recognize
4588 constructs inside of brace lists. A brace list is defined as an
4589 @code{enum} or aggregate initializer list, such as might statically
4590 initialize an array of structs. The three special aggregate constructs
4591 in Pike, @code{(@{ @})}, @code{([ ])} and @code{(< >)}, are treated as
4592 brace lists too. An example:
4593
4594 @example
4595 1: static char* ingredients[] =
4596 2: @{
4597 3: "Ham",
4598 4: "Salt",
4599 5: NULL
4600 6: @};
4601 @end example
4602
4603 @ssindex brace-list-open
4604 @ssindex brace-list-intro
4605 @ssindex brace-list-close
4606 @ssindex brace-list-entry
4607 Following convention, line 2 in this example is assigned
4608 @code{brace-list-open} syntax, and line 3 is assigned
4609 @code{brace-list-intro} syntax. Likewise, line 6 is assigned
4610 @code{brace-list-close} syntax. Lines 4 and 5 however, are assigned
4611 @code{brace-list-entry} syntax, as would all subsequent lines in this
4612 initializer list.
4613
4614 @ssindex brace-entry-open
4615 Your static initializer might be initializing nested structures, for
4616 example:
4617
4618 @example
4619 1: struct intpairs[] =
4620 2: @{
4621 3: @{ 1, 2 @},
4622 4: @{
4623 5: 3,
4624 6: 4
4625 7: @}
4626 8: @{ 1,
4627 9: 2 @},
4628 10: @{ 3, 4 @}
4629 11: @};
4630 @end example
4631
4632 Here, you've already seen the analysis of lines 1, 2, 3, and 11. On
4633 line 4, things get interesting; this line is assigned
4634 @code{brace-entry-open} syntactic symbol because it's a bracelist entry
4635 line that starts with an open brace. Lines 5 and 6 (and line 9) are
4636 pretty standard, and line 7 is a @code{brace-list-close} as you'd
4637 expect. Once again, line 8 is assigned as @code{brace-entry-open} as is
4638 line 10.
4639
4640 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4641 @node External Scope Symbols, Paren List Symbols, Brace List Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4642 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4643 @subsection External Scope Symbols
4644 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4645
4646 External language definition blocks also have their own syntactic
4647 symbols. In this example:
4648
4649 @example
4650 1: extern "C"
4651 2: @{
4652 3: int thing_one( int );
4653 4: int thing_two( double );
4654 5: @}
4655 @end example
4656
4657 @ssindex extern-lang-open
4658 @ssindex extern-lang-close
4659 @ssindex inextern-lang
4660 @ssindex inclass
4661 @noindent
4662 line 2 is given the @code{extern-lang-open} syntax, while line 5 is given
4663 the @code{extern-lang-close} syntax. The analysis for line 3 yields:
4664
4665 @example
4666 ((inextern-lang) (topmost-intro 14))
4667 @end example
4668
4669 @noindent
4670 where @code{inextern-lang} is a modifier similar in purpose to
4671 @code{inclass}.
4672
4673 There are various other top level blocks like @code{extern}, and they
4674 are all treated in the same way except that the symbols are named after
4675 the keyword that introduces the block. E.g., C++ namespace blocks get
4676 the three symbols @code{namespace-open}, @code{namespace-close} and
4677 @code{innamespace}. The currently recognized top level blocks are:
4678
4679 @table @asis
4680 @item @code{extern-lang-open}, @code{extern-lang-close}, @code{inextern-lang}
4681 @code{extern} blocks in C and C++.@footnote{These should logically be
4682 named @code{extern-open}, @code{extern-close} and @code{inextern}, but
4683 that isn't the case for historical reasons.}
4684
4685 @item @code{namespace-open}, @code{namespace-close}, @code{innamespace}
4686 @ssindex namespace-open
4687 @ssindex namespace-close
4688 @ssindex innamespace
4689 @code{namespace} blocks in C++.
4690
4691 @item @code{module-open}, @code{module-close}, @code{inmodule}
4692 @ssindex module-open
4693 @ssindex module-close
4694 @ssindex inmodule
4695 @code{module} blocks in CORBA IDL.
4696
4697 @item @code{composition-open}, @code{composition-close}, @code{incomposition}
4698 @ssindex composition-open
4699 @ssindex composition-close
4700 @ssindex incomposition
4701 @code{composition} blocks in CORBA CIDL.
4702 @end table
4703
4704 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4705 @node Paren List Symbols, Literal Symbols, External Scope Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4706 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4707 @subsection Parenthesis (Argument) List Symbols
4708 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4709
4710 A number of syntactic symbols are associated with parenthesis lists,
4711 a.k.a argument lists, as found in function declarations and function
4712 calls. This example illustrates these:
4713
4714 @example
4715 1: void a_function( int line1,
4716 2: int line2 );
4717 3:
4718 4: void a_longer_function(
4719 5: int line1,
4720 6: int line2
4721 7: );
4722 8:
4723 9: void call_them( int line1, int line2 )
4724 10: @{
4725 11: a_function(
4726 12: line1,
4727 13: line2
4728 14: );
4729 15:
4730 16: a_longer_function( line1,
4731 17: line2 );
4732 18: @}
4733 @end example
4734
4735 @ssindex arglist-intro
4736 @ssindex arglist-close
4737 Lines 5 and 12 are assigned @code{arglist-intro} syntax since they are
4738 the first line following the open parenthesis, and lines 7 and 14 are
4739 assigned @code{arglist-close} syntax since they contain the parenthesis
4740 that closes the argument list.
4741
4742 @ssindex arglist-cont-nonempty
4743 @ssindex arglist-cont
4744 Lines that continue argument lists can be assigned one of two syntactic
4745 symbols. For example, Lines 2 and 17
4746 are assigned @code{arglist-cont-nonempty} syntax. What this means
4747 is that they continue an argument list, but that the line containing the
4748 parenthesis that opens the list is @emph{not empty} following the open
4749 parenthesis. Contrast this against lines 6 and 13 which are assigned
4750 @code{arglist-cont} syntax. This is because the parenthesis that opens
4751 their argument lists is the last character on that line.
4752
4753 Syntactic elements with @code{arglist-intro},
4754 @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, and @code{arglist-close} contain two
4755 buffer positions: the anchor position (the beginning of the
4756 declaration or statement) and the position of the open parenthesis.
4757 The latter position can be used in a line-up function (@pxref{Line-Up
4758 Functions}).
4759
4760 Note that there is no @code{arglist-open} syntax. This is because any
4761 parenthesis that opens an argument list, appearing on a separate line,
4762 is assigned the @code{statement-cont} syntax instead.
4763
4764 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4765 @node Literal Symbols, Multiline Macro Symbols, Paren List Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4766 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4767 @subsection Comment String Label and Macro Symbols
4768 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4769
4770 A few miscellaneous syntactic symbols that haven't been previously
4771 covered are illustrated by this C++ example:
4772
4773 @example
4774 1: void Bass::play( int volume )
4775 2: const
4776 3: @{
4777 4: /* this line starts a multiline
4778 5: * comment. This line should get 'c' syntax */
4779 6:
4780 7: char* a_multiline_string = "This line starts a multiline \
4781 8: string. This line should get 'string' syntax.";
4782 9:
4783 10: note:
4784 11: @{
4785 12: #ifdef LOCK
4786 13: Lock acquire();
4787 14: #endif // LOCK
4788 15: slap_pop();
4789 16: cout << "I played "
4790 17: << "a note\n";
4791 18: @}
4792 19: @}
4793 @end example
4794
4795 The lines to note in this example include:
4796
4797 @itemize @bullet
4798 @item
4799 @ssindex func-decl-cont
4800 Line 2 is assigned the @code{func-decl-cont} syntax.
4801
4802 @item
4803 @ssindex comment-intro
4804 Line 4 is assigned both @code{defun-block-intro} @emph{and}
4805 @code{comment-intro} syntax. A syntactic element with
4806 @code{comment-intro} has no anchor point. It is always accompanied
4807 by another syntactic element which does have one.
4808
4809 @item
4810 @ssindex c
4811 Line 5 is assigned @code{c} syntax.
4812
4813 @item
4814 @cindex syntactic whitespace
4815 Line 6 which, even though it contains nothing but whitespace, is
4816 assigned @code{defun-block-intro}. Note that the appearance of the
4817 comment on lines 4 and 5 do not cause line 6 to be assigned
4818 @code{statement} syntax because comments are considered to be
4819 @dfn{syntactic whitespace}, which are ignored when analyzing
4820 code.
4821
4822 @item
4823 @ssindex string
4824 Line 8 is assigned @code{string} syntax.
4825
4826 @item
4827 @ssindex label
4828 Line 10 is assigned @code{label} syntax.
4829
4830 @item
4831 @ssindex block-open
4832 Line 11 is assigned @code{block-open} as well as @code{statement}
4833 syntax. A @code{block-open} syntactic element doesn't have an anchor
4834 position, since it always appears with another syntactic element which
4835 does have one.
4836
4837 @item
4838 @ssindex cpp-macro
4839 Lines 12 and 14 are assigned @code{cpp-macro} syntax in addition to the
4840 normal syntactic symbols (@code{statement-block-intro} and
4841 @code{statement}, respectively). Normally @code{cpp-macro} is
4842 configured to cancel out the normal syntactic context to make all
4843 preprocessor directives stick to the first column, but that's easily
4844 changed if you want preprocessor directives to be indented like the rest
4845 of the code. Like @code{comment-intro}, a syntactic element with
4846 @code{cpp-macro} doesn't contain an anchor position.
4847
4848 @item
4849 @ssindex stream-op
4850 Line 17 is assigned @code{stream-op} syntax.
4851 @end itemize
4852
4853 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4854 @node Multiline Macro Symbols, Objective-C Method Symbols, Literal Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4855 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4856 @subsection Multiline Macro Symbols
4857 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4858
4859 @cindex multiline macros
4860 @cindex syntactic whitespace
4861 @ssindex cpp-define-intro
4862 @ssindex cpp-macro-cont
4863 Multiline preprocessor macro definitions are normally handled just like
4864 other code, i.e., the lines inside them are indented according to the
4865 syntactic analysis of the preceding lines inside the macro. The first
4866 line inside a macro definition (i.e., the line after the starting line of
4867 the cpp directive itself) gets @code{cpp-define-intro}. In this example:
4868
4869 @example
4870 1: #define LIST_LOOP(cons, listp) \
4871 2: for (cons = listp; !NILP (cons); cons = XCDR (cons)) \
4872 3: if (!CONSP (cons)) \
4873 4: signal_error ("Invalid list format", listp); \
4874 5: else
4875 @end example
4876
4877 @noindent
4878 line 1 is given the syntactic symbol @code{cpp-macro}. The first line
4879 of a cpp directive is always given that symbol. Line 2 is given
4880 @code{cpp-define-intro}, so that you can give the macro body as a whole
4881 some extra indentation. Lines 3 through 5 are then analyzed as normal
4882 code, i.e., @code{substatement} on lines 3 and 4, and @code{else-clause}
4883 on line 5.
4884
4885 The syntactic analysis inside macros can be turned off with
4886 @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} (@pxref{Custom Macros}). In
4887 that case, lines 2 through 5 would all be given @code{cpp-macro-cont}
4888 with an anchor position pointing to the @code{#} which starts the cpp
4889 directive@footnote{This is how @ccmode{} 5.28 and earlier analyzed
4890 macros.}.
4891
4892 @xref{Custom Macros}, for more info about the treatment of macros.
4893
4894 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4895 @node Objective-C Method Symbols, Java Symbols, Multiline Macro Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4896 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4897 @subsection Objective-C Method Symbols
4898 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4899
4900 In Objective-C buffers, there are three additional syntactic symbols
4901 assigned to various message calling constructs. Here's an example
4902 illustrating these:
4903
4904 @example
4905 1: - (void)setDelegate:anObject
4906 2: withStuff:stuff
4907 3: @{
4908 4: [delegate masterWillRebind:self
4909 5: toDelegate:anObject
4910 6: withExtraStuff:stuff];
4911 7: @}
4912 @end example
4913
4914 @ssindex objc-method-intro
4915 @ssindex objc-method-args-cont
4916 @ssindex objc-method-call-cont
4917 Here, line 1 is assigned @code{objc-method-intro} syntax, and line 2 is
4918 assigned @code{objc-method-args-cont} syntax. Lines 5 and 6 are both
4919 assigned @code{objc-method-call-cont} syntax.
4920
4921 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4922 @node Java Symbols, Statement Block Symbols, Objective-C Method Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4923 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4924 @subsection Java Symbols
4925 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4926
4927 Java has a concept of anonymous classes which can look something like
4928 this:
4929
4930 @example
4931 1: @@Test
4932 2: public void watch(Observable o) @{
4933 3: @@NonNull
4934 4: Observer obs = new Observer() @{
4935 5: public void update(Observable o, Object arg) @{
4936 6: history.addElement(arg);
4937 7: @}
4938 8: @};
4939 9: o.addObserver(obs);
4940 10: @}
4941 @end example
4942
4943 @ssindex inexpr-class
4944 The brace following the @code{new} operator opens the anonymous class.
4945 Lines 5 and 8 are assigned the @code{inexpr-class} syntax, besides the
4946 @code{inclass} symbol used in normal classes. Thus, the class will be
4947 indented just like a normal class, with the added indentation given to
4948 @code{inexpr-class}. An @code{inexpr-class} syntactic element doesn't
4949 have an anchor position.
4950
4951 @ssindex annotation-top-cont
4952 @ssindex annotation-var-cont
4953 Line 2 is assigned the @code{annotation-top-cont} syntax, due to it being a
4954 continuation of a topmost introduction with an annotation symbol preceding
4955 the current line. Similarly, line 4 is assigned the @code{annotation-var-cont}
4956 syntax due to it being a continuation of a variable declaration where preceding
4957 the declaration is an annotation.
4958
4959 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4960 @node Statement Block Symbols, K&R Symbols, Java Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4961 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4962 @subsection Statement Block Symbols
4963 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4964
4965 There are a few occasions where a statement block might be used inside
4966 an expression. One is in C or C++ code using the gcc extension for
4967 this, e.g.:
4968
4969 @example
4970 1: int res = (@{
4971 2: int y = foo (); int z;
4972 3: if (y > 0) z = y; else z = - y;
4973 4: z;
4974 5: @});
4975 @end example
4976
4977 @ssindex inexpr-statement
4978 Lines 2 and 5 get the @code{inexpr-statement} syntax, besides the
4979 symbols they'd get in a normal block. Therefore, the indentation put on
4980 @code{inexpr-statement} is added to the normal statement block
4981 indentation. An @code{inexpr-statement} syntactic element doesn't
4982 contain an anchor position.
4983
4984 In Pike code, there are a few other situations where blocks occur inside
4985 statements, as illustrated here:
4986
4987 @example
4988 1: array itgob()
4989 2: @{
4990 3: string s = map (backtrace()[-2][3..],
4991 4: lambda
4992 5: (mixed arg)
4993 6: @{
4994 7: return sprintf ("%t", arg);
4995 8: @}) * ", " + "\n";
4996 9: return catch @{
4997 10: write (s + "\n");
4998 11: @};
4999 12: @}
5000 @end example
5001
5002 @ssindex inlambda
5003 @ssindex lambda-intro-cont
5004 Lines 4 through 8 contain a lambda function, which @ccmode{} recognizes
5005 by the @code{lambda} keyword. If the function argument list is put
5006 on a line of its own, as in line 5, it gets the @code{lambda-intro-cont}
5007 syntax. The function body is handled as an inline method body, with the
5008 addition of the @code{inlambda} syntactic symbol. This means that line
5009 6 gets @code{inlambda} and @code{inline-open}, and line 8 gets
5010 @code{inline-close}@footnote{You might wonder why it doesn't get
5011 @code{inlambda} too. It's because the closing brace is relative to the
5012 opening brace, which stands on its own line in this example. If the
5013 opening brace was hanging on the previous line, then the closing brace
5014 would get the @code{inlambda} syntax too to be indented correctly.}.
5015
5016 @ssindex inexpr-statement
5017 On line 9, @code{catch} is a special function taking a statement block
5018 as its argument. The block is handled as an in-expression statement
5019 with the @code{inexpr-statement} syntax, just like the gcc extended C
5020 example above. The other similar special function, @code{gauge}, is
5021 handled like this too.
5022
5023 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5024 @node K&R Symbols, , Statement Block Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
5025 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5026 @subsection K&R Symbols
5027 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5028
5029 @ssindex knr-argdecl-intro
5030 @ssindex knr-argdecl
5031 Two other syntactic symbols can appear in old style, non-prototyped C
5032 code @footnote{a.k.a.@: K&R C, or Kernighan & Ritchie C}:
5033
5034 @example
5035 1: int add_three_integers(a, b, c)
5036 2: int a;
5037 3: int b;
5038 4: int c;
5039 5: @{
5040 6: return a + b + c;
5041 7: @}
5042 @end example
5043
5044 Here, line 2 is the first line in an argument declaration list and so is
5045 given the @code{knr-argdecl-intro} syntactic symbol. Subsequent lines
5046 (i.e., lines 3 and 4 in this example), are given @code{knr-argdecl}
5047 syntax.
5048
5049
5050 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5051 @node Indentation Calculation, , Syntactic Symbols, Indentation Engine Basics
5052 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5053 @section Indentation Calculation
5054 @cindex indentation
5055 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5056
5057 Indentation for a line is calculated from the syntactic context
5058 (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis}).
5059
5060 First, a buffer position is found whose column will be the base for the
5061 indentation calculation. It's the anchor position in the first
5062 syntactic element that provides one that is used. If no syntactic
5063 element has an anchor position then column zero is used.
5064
5065 Second, the syntactic symbols in each syntactic element are looked up
5066 in the @code{c-offsets-alist} style variable
5067 (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}), which is an association list of syntactic
5068 symbols and the offsets to apply for those symbols. These offsets are
5069 added together with the base column to produce the new indentation
5070 column.
5071
5072 Let's use our two code examples above to see how this works. Here is
5073 our first example again:
5074
5075 @example
5076 1: void swap( int& a, int& b )
5077 2: @{
5078 3: int tmp = a;
5079 4: a = b;
5080 5: b = tmp;
5081 6: @}
5082 @end example
5083
5084 Let's say point is on line 3 and we hit the @key{TAB} key to reindent
5085 the line. The syntactic context for that line is:
5086
5087 @example
5088 ((defun-block-intro 29))
5089 @end example
5090
5091 @noindent
5092 Since buffer position 29 is the first and only anchor position in the
5093 list, @ccmode{} goes there and asks for the current column. This brace
5094 is in column zero, so @ccmode{} uses @samp{0} as the base column.
5095
5096 Next, @ccmode{} looks up @code{defun-block-intro} in the
5097 @code{c-offsets-alist} style variable. Let's say it finds the value
5098 @samp{4}; it adds this to the base column @samp{0}, yielding a running
5099 total indentation of 4 spaces.
5100
5101 Since there is only one syntactic element on the list for this line,
5102 indentation calculation is complete, and the total indentation for the
5103 line is 4 spaces.
5104
5105 Here's another example:
5106
5107 @example
5108 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
5109 2: @{
5110 3: if( doit )
5111 4: @{
5112 5: return( val + incr );
5113 6: @}
5114 7: return( val );
5115 8: @}
5116 @end example
5117
5118 If we were to hit @kbd{TAB} on line 4 in the above example, the same
5119 basic process is performed, despite the differences in the syntactic
5120 context. The context for this line is:
5121
5122 @example
5123 ((substatement-open 46))
5124 @end example
5125
5126 Here, @ccmode{} goes to buffer position 46, which is the @samp{i} in
5127 @code{if} on line 3. This character is in the fourth column on that
5128 line so the base column is @samp{4}. Then @ccmode{} looks up the
5129 @code{substatement-open} symbol in @code{c-offsets-alist}. Let's say it
5130 finds the value @samp{4}. It's added with the base column and yields an
5131 indentation for the line of 8 spaces.
5132
5133 Simple, huh?
5134
5135 Actually, it's a bit more complicated than that since the entries on
5136 @code{c-offsets-alist} can be much more than plain offsets.
5137 @xref{c-offsets-alist}, for the full story.
5138
5139 Anyway, the mode usually just does The Right Thing without you having to
5140 think about it in this much detail. But when customizing indentation,
5141 it's helpful to understand the general indentation model being used.
5142
5143 As you configure @ccmode{}, you might want to set the variable
5144 @code{c-echo-syntactic-information-p} to non-@code{nil} so that the
5145 syntactic context and calculated offset always is echoed in the
5146 minibuffer when you hit @kbd{TAB}.
5147
5148
5149 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5150 @node Customizing Indentation, Custom Macros, Indentation Engine Basics, Top
5151 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5152 @chapter Customizing Indentation
5153 @cindex customization, indentation
5154 @cindex indentation
5155 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5156
5157 The principal variable for customizing indentation is the style
5158 variable @code{c-offsets-alist}, which gives an @dfn{offset} (an
5159 indentation rule) for each syntactic symbol. Its structure and
5160 semantics are completely described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. The
5161 various ways you can set the variable, including the use of the
5162 @ccmode{} style system, are described in @ref{Config Basics} and its
5163 sections, in particular @ref{Style Variables}.
5164
5165 The simplest and most used kind of ``offset'' setting in
5166 @code{c-offsets-alist} is in terms of multiples of
5167 @code{c-basic-offset}:
5168
5169 @defopt c-basic-offset
5170 @vindex basic-offset (c-)
5171 This style variable holds the basic offset between indentation levels.
5172 It's factory default is 4, but all the built-in styles set it
5173 themselves, to some value between 2 (for @code{gnu} style) and 8 (for
5174 @code{bsd}, @code{linux}, and @code{python} styles).
5175 @end defopt
5176
5177 The most flexible ``offset'' setting you can make in
5178 @code{c-offsets-alist} is a line-up function (or even a list of them),
5179 either one supplied by @ccmode{} (@pxref{Line-Up Functions}) or one
5180 you write yourself (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}).
5181
5182 Finally, in @ref{Other Indentation} you'll find the tool of last
5183 resort: a hook which is called after a line has been indented. You
5184 can install functions here to make ad-hoc adjustments to any line's
5185 indentation.
5186
5187 @menu
5188 * c-offsets-alist::
5189 * Interactive Customization::
5190 * Line-Up Functions::
5191 * Custom Line-Up::
5192 * Other Indentation::
5193 @end menu
5194
5195
5196 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5197 @node c-offsets-alist, Interactive Customization, Customizing Indentation, Customizing Indentation
5198 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5199 @section c-offsets-alist
5200 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5201
5202 This section explains the structure and semantics of the style
5203 variable @code{c-offsets-alist}, the principal variable for configuring
5204 indentation. Details of how to set it up, and its relationship to
5205 @ccmode{}'s style system are given in @ref{Style Variables}.
5206
5207 @defopt c-offsets-alist
5208 @vindex offsets-alist (c-)
5209 This is an alist which associates an offset with each syntactic
5210 symbol. This @dfn{offset} is a rule specifying how to indent a line
5211 whose syntactic context matches the symbol. @xref{Syntactic
5212 Analysis}.
5213
5214 Note that the buffer-local binding of this alist in a @ccmode{} buffer
5215 contains an entry for @emph{every} syntactic symbol. Its global
5216 binding and its settings within style specifications usually contain
5217 only a few entries. @xref{Style Variables}.
5218
5219 The offset specification associated with any particular syntactic
5220 symbol can be an integer, a variable name, a vector, a function or
5221 lambda expression, a list, or one of the following special symbols:
5222 @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{++}, @code{--}, @code{*}, or @code{/}. The
5223 meanings of these values are described in detail below.
5224
5225 Here is an example fragment of a @code{c-offsets-alist}, showing some
5226 of these kinds of offsets:
5227
5228 @example
5229 ((statement . 0)
5230 (substatement . +)
5231 (cpp-macro . [0])
5232 (topmost-intro-cont . c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont)
5233 (statement-block-intro . (add c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block
5234 c-indent-multi-line-block))
5235 @dots{}
5236 @*)
5237 @end example
5238 @end defopt
5239
5240 @deffn Command c-set-offset (@kbd{C-c C-o})
5241 @findex set-offset (c-)
5242 @kindex C-c C-o
5243 This command changes the entry for a syntactic symbol in the current
5244 binding of @code{c-offsets-alist}, or it inserts a new entry if there
5245 isn't already one for that syntactic symbol.
5246
5247 You can use @code{c-set-offset} interactively within a @ccmode{}
5248 buffer to make experimental changes to your indentation settings.
5249 @kbd{C-c C-o} prompts you for the syntactic symbol to change
5250 (defaulting to that of the current line) and the new offset
5251 (defaulting to the current offset).
5252
5253 @code{c-set-offset} takes two arguments when used programmatically:
5254 @var{symbol}, the syntactic element symbol to change and @var{offset},
5255 the new offset for that syntactic element. You can call the command
5256 in your @file{.emacs} to change the global binding of
5257 @code{c-offsets-alist} (@pxref{Style Variables}); you can use it in a
5258 hook function to make changes from the current style. @ccmode{}
5259 itself uses this function when initializing styles.
5260 @end deffn
5261
5262 @cindex offset specification
5263 The ``offset specifications'' in @code{c-offsets-alist} can be any of
5264 the following:
5265
5266 @table @asis
5267 @item An integer
5268 The integer specifies a relative offset. All relative
5269 offsets@footnote{The syntactic context @code{@w{((defun-block-intro
5270 2724) (comment-intro))}} would likely have two relative offsets.} will
5271 be added together and used to calculate the indentation relative to an
5272 anchor position earlier in the buffer. @xref{Indentation
5273 Calculation}, for details. Most of the time, it's probably better to
5274 use one of the special symbols like @code{+} than an integer (apart
5275 from zero).
5276
5277 @item One of the symbols @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{++}, @code{--}, @code{*}, or @code{/}
5278 These special symbols describe a relative offset in multiples of
5279 @code{c-basic-offset}:
5280
5281 By defining a style's indentation in terms of @code{c-basic-offset},
5282 you can change the amount of whitespace given to an indentation level
5283 while maintaining the same basic shape of your code. Here are the
5284 values that the special symbols correspond to:
5285
5286 @table @code
5287 @item +
5288 @code{c-basic-offset} times 1
5289 @item -
5290 @code{c-basic-offset} times @minus{}1
5291 @item ++
5292 @code{c-basic-offset} times 2
5293 @item --
5294 @code{c-basic-offset} times @minus{}2
5295 @item *
5296 @code{c-basic-offset} times 0.5
5297 @item /
5298 @code{c-basic-offset} times @minus{}0.5
5299 @end table
5300
5301 @item A vector
5302 The first element of the vector, an integer, sets the absolute
5303 indentation column. This will override any previously calculated
5304 indentation, but won't override relative indentation calculated from
5305 syntactic elements later on in the syntactic context of the line being
5306 indented. @xref{Indentation Calculation}. Any elements in the vector
5307 beyond the first will be ignored.
5308
5309 @item A function or lambda expression
5310 The function will be called and its return value will in turn be
5311 evaluated as an offset specification. Functions are useful when more
5312 context than just the syntactic symbol is needed to get the desired
5313 indentation. @xref{Line-Up Functions}, and @ref{Custom Line-Up}, for
5314 details about them.
5315
5316 @item A symbol with a variable binding
5317 If the symbol also has a function binding, the function takes
5318 precedence over the variable. Otherwise the value of the variable is
5319 used. It must be an integer (which is used as relative offset) or a
5320 vector (an absolute offset).
5321
5322 @item A list
5323 The offset can also be a list containing several offset
5324 specifications; these are evaluated recursively and combined. A list
5325 is typically only useful when some of the offsets are line-up
5326 functions. A common strategy is calling a sequence of functions in
5327 turn until one of them recognizes that it is appropriate for the
5328 source line and returns a non-@code{nil} value.
5329
5330 @code{nil} values are always ignored when the offsets are combined.
5331 The first element of the list specifies the method of combining the
5332 non-@code{nil} offsets from the remaining elements:
5333
5334 @table @code
5335 @item first
5336 Use the first offset that doesn't evaluate to @code{nil}. Subsequent
5337 elements of the list don't get evaluated.
5338 @item min
5339 Use the minimum of all the offsets. All must be either relative or
5340 absolute; they can't be mixed.
5341 @item max
5342 Use the maximum of all the offsets. All must be either relative or
5343 absolute; they can't be mixed.
5344 @item add
5345 Add all the evaluated offsets together. Exactly one of them may be
5346 absolute, in which case the result is absolute. Any relative offsets
5347 that preceded the absolute one in the list will be ignored in that case.
5348 @end table
5349
5350 As a compatibility measure, if the first element is none of the above
5351 then it too will be taken as an offset specification and the whole list
5352 will be combined according to the method @code{first}.
5353 @end table
5354
5355 @vindex c-strict-syntax-p
5356 @vindex strict-syntax-p (c-)
5357 If an offset specification evaluates to @code{nil}, then a relative
5358 offset of 0 (zero) is used@footnote{There is however a variable
5359 @code{c-strict-syntax-p} that when set to non-@code{nil} will cause an
5360 error to be signaled in that case. It's now considered obsolete since
5361 it doesn't work well with some of the alignment functions that return
5362 @code{nil} instead of zero. You should therefore leave
5363 @code{c-strict-syntax-p} set to @code{nil}.}.
5364
5365 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5366 @node Interactive Customization, Line-Up Functions, c-offsets-alist, Customizing Indentation
5367 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5368 @section Interactive Customization
5369 @cindex customization, interactive
5370 @cindex interactive customization
5371 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5372
5373 As an example of how to customize indentation, let's change the
5374 style of this example@footnote{In this and subsequent examples, the
5375 original code is formatted using the @samp{gnu} style unless otherwise
5376 indicated. @xref{Styles}.}:
5377
5378 @example
5379 @group
5380 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
5381 2: @{
5382 3: if( doit )
5383 4: @{
5384 5: return( val + incr );
5385 6: @}
5386 7: return( val );
5387 8: @}
5388 @end group
5389 @end example
5390
5391 @noindent
5392 to:
5393
5394 @example
5395 @group
5396 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
5397 2: @{
5398 3: if( doit )
5399 4: @{
5400 5: return( val + incr );
5401 6: @}
5402 7: return( val );
5403 8: @}
5404 @end group
5405 @end example
5406
5407 In other words, we want to change the indentation of braces that open a
5408 block following a condition so that the braces line up under the
5409 conditional, instead of being indented. Notice that the construct we
5410 want to change starts on line 4. To change the indentation of a line,
5411 we need to see which syntactic symbols affect the offset calculations
5412 for that line. Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 4 yields:
5413
5414 @example
5415 ((substatement-open 44))
5416 @end example
5417
5418 @noindent
5419 so we know that to change the offset of the open brace, we need to
5420 change the indentation for the @code{substatement-open} syntactic
5421 symbol.
5422
5423 To do this interactively, just hit @kbd{C-c C-o}. This prompts
5424 you for the syntactic symbol to change, providing a reasonable default.
5425 In this case, the default is @code{substatement-open}, which is just the
5426 syntactic symbol we want to change!
5427
5428 After you hit return, @ccmode{} will then prompt you for the new
5429 offset value, with the old value as the default. The default in this
5430 case is @samp{+}, but we want no extra indentation so enter
5431 @samp{0} and @kbd{RET}. This will associate the offset 0 with the
5432 syntactic symbol @code{substatement-open}.
5433
5434 To check your changes quickly, just hit @kbd{C-c C-q}
5435 (@code{c-indent-defun}) to reindent the entire function. The example
5436 should now look like:
5437
5438 @example
5439 @group
5440 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
5441 2: @{
5442 3: if( doit )
5443 4: @{
5444 5: return( val + incr );
5445 6: @}
5446 7: return( val );
5447 8: @}
5448 @end group
5449 @end example
5450
5451 Notice how just changing the open brace offset on line 4 is all we
5452 needed to do. Since the other affected lines are indented relative to
5453 line 4, they are automatically indented the way you'd expect. For more
5454 complicated examples, this might not always work. The general approach
5455 to take is to always start adjusting offsets for lines higher up in the
5456 file, then reindent and see if any following lines need further
5457 adjustments.
5458
5459 @c Move this bit to "Styles" (2005/10/7)
5460 @deffn Command c-set-offset symbol offset
5461 @findex set-offset (c-)
5462 @kindex C-c C-o
5463 This is the command bound to @kbd{C-c C-o}. It provides a convenient
5464 way to set offsets on @code{c-offsets-alist} both interactively (see
5465 the example above) and from your mode hook.
5466
5467 It takes two arguments when used programmatically: @var{symbol} is the
5468 syntactic element symbol to change and @var{offset} is the new offset
5469 for that syntactic element.
5470 @end deffn
5471 @c End of MOVE THIS BIT.
5472
5473 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5474 @node Line-Up Functions, Custom Line-Up, Interactive Customization, Customizing Indentation
5475 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5476 @section Line-Up Functions
5477 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5478
5479 @cindex line-up function
5480 @cindex indentation function
5481 Often there are cases when a simple offset setting on a syntactic
5482 symbol isn't enough to get the desired indentation---for example, you
5483 might want to line up a closing parenthesis with the matching opening
5484 one rather than indenting relative to its ``anchor point''. @ccmode{}
5485 provides this flexibility with @dfn{line-up functions}.
5486
5487 The way you associate a line-up function with a syntactic symbol is
5488 described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. @ccmode{} comes with many
5489 predefined line-up functions for common situations. If none of these
5490 does what you want, you can write your own. @xref{Custom Line-Up}.
5491 Sometimes, it is easier to tweak the standard indentation by adding a
5492 function to @code{c-special-indent-hook} (@pxref{Other Indentation}).
5493
5494 The line-up functions haven't been adapted for AWK buffers or tested
5495 with them. Some of them might work serendipitously. There shouldn't be
5496 any problems writing custom line-up functions for AWK mode.
5497
5498 The calling convention for line-up functions is described fully in
5499 @ref{Custom Line-Up}. Roughly speaking, the return value is either an
5500 offset itself (such as @code{+} or @code{[0]}) or it's @code{nil},
5501 meaning ``this function is inappropriate in this case; try a
5502 different one''. @xref{c-offsets-alist}.
5503
5504 The subsections below describe all the standard line-up functions,
5505 categorized by the sort of token the lining-up centers around. For
5506 each of these functions there is a ``works with'' list that indicates
5507 which syntactic symbols the function is intended to be used with.
5508
5509 @macro workswith
5510 @emph{Works with:@ }
5511 @end macro
5512 @ifinfo
5513 @unmacro workswith
5514 @macro workswith
5515 Works with:
5516 @end macro
5517 @end ifinfo
5518
5519 @macro sssTBasicOffset
5520 <--> @i{c-basic-offset}@c
5521 @end macro
5522
5523 @macro sssTsssTBasicOffset
5524 <--><--> @i{c-basic-offset}@c
5525 @end macro
5526
5527 @macro hereFn{func}
5528 <- @i{\func\}@c
5529 @end macro
5530
5531 @c The TeX backend seems to insert extra spaces around the argument. :P
5532 @iftex
5533 @unmacro hereFn
5534 @macro hereFn{func}
5535 <-@i{\func\}@c
5536 @end macro
5537 @end iftex
5538
5539 @menu
5540 * Brace/Paren Line-Up::
5541 * List Line-Up::
5542 * Operator Line-Up::
5543 * Comment Line-Up::
5544 * Misc Line-Up::
5545 @end menu
5546
5547 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5548 @node Brace/Paren Line-Up, List Line-Up, Line-Up Functions, Line-Up Functions
5549 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5550 @subsection Brace and Parenthesis Line-Up Functions
5551 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5552
5553 The line-up functions here calculate the indentation for braces,
5554 parentheses and statements within brace blocks.
5555
5556 @defun c-lineup-close-paren
5557 @findex lineup-close-paren (c-)
5558 Line up the closing paren under its corresponding open paren if the
5559 open paren is followed by code. If the open paren ends its line, no
5560 indentation is added. E.g.:
5561
5562 @example
5563 @group
5564 main (int,
5565 char **
5566 ) @hereFn{c-lineup-close-paren}
5567 @end group
5568 @end example
5569
5570 @noindent
5571 and
5572
5573 @example
5574 @group
5575 main (
5576 int, char **
5577 ) @hereFn{c-lineup-close-paren}
5578 @end group
5579 @end example
5580
5581 As a special case, if a brace block is opened at the same line as the
5582 open parenthesis of the argument list, the indentation is
5583 @code{c-basic-offset} instead of the open paren column. See
5584 @code{c-lineup-arglist} for further discussion of this ``DWIM'' measure.
5585
5586 @workswith All @code{*-close} symbols.
5587 @end defun
5588
5589 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5590
5591 @anchor{c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren}
5592 @defun c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren
5593 @findex lineup-arglist-close-under-paren (c-)
5594 Set your @code{arglist-close} syntactic symbol to this line-up function
5595 so that parentheses that close argument lists will line up under the
5596 parenthesis that opened the argument list. It can also be used with
5597 @code{arglist-cont} and @code{arglist-cont-nonempty} to line up all
5598 lines inside a parenthesis under the open paren.
5599
5600 As a special case, if a brace block is opened at the same line as the
5601 open parenthesis of the argument list, the indentation is
5602 @code{c-basic-offset} only. See @code{c-lineup-arglist} for further
5603 discussion of this ``DWIM'' measure.
5604
5605 @workswith Almost all symbols, but are typically most useful on
5606 @code{arglist-close}, @code{brace-list-close}, @code{arglist-cont} and
5607 @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
5608 @end defun
5609
5610 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5611
5612 @defun c-indent-one-line-block
5613 @findex indent-one-line-block (c-)
5614 Indent a one line block @code{c-basic-offset} extra. E.g.:
5615
5616 @example
5617 @group
5618 if (n > 0)
5619 @{m+=n; n=0;@} @hereFn{c-indent-one-line-block}
5620 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5621 @end group
5622 @end example
5623
5624 @noindent
5625 and
5626
5627 @example
5628 @group
5629 if (n > 0)
5630 @{ @hereFn{c-indent-one-line-block}
5631 m+=n; n=0;
5632 @}
5633 @end group
5634 @end example
5635
5636 The block may be surrounded by any kind of parenthesis characters.
5637 @code{nil} is returned if the line doesn't start with a one line block,
5638 which makes the function usable in list expressions.
5639
5640 @workswith Almost all syntactic symbols, but most useful on the
5641 @code{-open} symbols.
5642 @end defun
5643
5644 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5645
5646 @defun c-indent-multi-line-block
5647 @findex indent-multi-line-block (c-)
5648 Indent a multiline block @code{c-basic-offset} extra. E.g.:
5649
5650 @example
5651 @group
5652 int *foo[] = @{
5653 NULL,
5654 @{17@}, @hereFn{c-indent-multi-line-block}
5655 @end group
5656 @end example
5657
5658 @noindent
5659 and
5660
5661 @example
5662 @group
5663 int *foo[] = @{
5664 NULL,
5665 @{ @hereFn{c-indent-multi-line-block}
5666 17
5667 @},
5668 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5669 @end group
5670 @end example
5671
5672 The block may be surrounded by any kind of parenthesis characters.
5673 @code{nil} is returned if the line doesn't start with a multiline
5674 block, which makes the function usable in list expressions.
5675
5676 @workswith Almost all syntactic symbols, but most useful on the
5677 @code{-open} symbols.
5678 @end defun
5679
5680 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5681
5682 @defun c-lineup-runin-statements
5683 @findex lineup-runin-statements (c-)
5684 Line up statements for coding standards which place the first statement
5685 in a block on the same line as the block opening brace@footnote{Run-in
5686 style doesn't really work too well. You might need to write your own
5687 custom line-up functions to better support this style.}. E.g.:
5688
5689 @example
5690 @group
5691 int main()
5692 @{ puts ("Hello!");
5693 return 0; @hereFn{c-lineup-runin-statements}
5694 @}
5695 @end group
5696 @end example
5697
5698 If there is no statement after the opening brace to align with,
5699 @code{nil} is returned. This makes the function usable in list
5700 expressions.
5701
5702 @workswith The @code{statement} syntactic symbol.
5703 @end defun
5704
5705 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5706
5707 @defun c-lineup-inexpr-block
5708 @findex lineup-inexpr-block (c-)
5709 This can be used with the in-expression block symbols to indent the
5710 whole block to the column where the construct is started. E.g., for Java
5711 anonymous classes, this lines up the class under the @samp{new} keyword,
5712 and in Pike it lines up the lambda function body under the @samp{lambda}
5713 keyword. Returns @code{nil} if the block isn't part of such a
5714 construct.
5715
5716 @workswith @code{inlambda}, @code{inexpr-statement},
5717 @code{inexpr-class}.
5718 @end defun
5719
5720 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5721
5722 @defun c-lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks
5723 @findex lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks (c-)
5724 Compensate for Whitesmith style indentation of blocks. Due to the way
5725 @ccmode{} calculates anchor positions for normal lines inside blocks,
5726 this function is necessary for those lines to get correct Whitesmith
5727 style indentation. Consider the following examples:
5728
5729 @example
5730 @group
5731 int foo()
5732 @{
5733 a;
5734 x; @hereFn{c-lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks}
5735 @end group
5736 @end example
5737
5738 @example
5739 @group
5740 int foo()
5741 @{
5742 @{
5743 a;
5744 @}
5745 x; @hereFn{c-lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks}
5746 @end group
5747 @end example
5748
5749 The fact that the line with @code{x} is preceded by a Whitesmith style
5750 indented block in the latter case and not the first should not affect
5751 its indentation. But since CC Mode in cases like this uses the
5752 indentation of the preceding statement as anchor position, the @code{x}
5753 would in the second case be indented too much if the offset for
5754 @code{statement} was set simply to zero.
5755
5756 This lineup function corrects for this situation by detecting if the
5757 anchor position is at an open paren character. In that case, it instead
5758 indents relative to the surrounding block just like
5759 @code{c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block}.
5760
5761 @workswith @code{brace-list-entry}, @code{brace-entry-open},
5762 @code{statement}, @code{arglist-cont}.
5763 @end defun
5764
5765 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5766
5767 @defun c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block
5768 @findex lineup-whitesmith-in-block (c-)
5769 Line up lines inside a block in Whitesmith style. It's done in a way
5770 that works both when the opening brace hangs and when it doesn't. E.g.:
5771
5772 @example
5773 @group
5774 something
5775 @{
5776 foo; @hereFn{c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block}
5777 @}
5778 @end group
5779 @end example
5780
5781 @noindent
5782 and
5783
5784 @example
5785 @group
5786 something @{
5787 foo; @hereFn{c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block}
5788 @}
5789 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5790 @end group
5791 @end example
5792
5793 In the first case the indentation is kept unchanged, in the second
5794 @code{c-basic-offset} is added.
5795
5796 @workswith @code{defun-close}, @code{defun-block-intro},
5797 @code{inline-close}, @code{block-close}, @code{brace-list-close},
5798 @code{brace-list-intro}, @code{statement-block-intro},
5799 @code{arglist-intro}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty},
5800 @code{arglist-close}, and all @code{in*} symbols, e.g., @code{inclass}
5801 and @code{inextern-lang}.
5802 @end defun
5803
5804 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5805 @node List Line-Up, Operator Line-Up, Brace/Paren Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
5806 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5807 @subsection List Line-Up Functions
5808 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5809
5810 The line-up functions here calculate the indentation for lines which
5811 form lists of items, usually separated by commas.
5812
5813 The function @ref{c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren}, which is mainly
5814 for indenting a close parenthesis, is also useful for the lines
5815 contained within parentheses.
5816
5817 @defun c-lineup-arglist
5818 @findex lineup-arglist (c-)
5819 Line up the current argument line under the first argument.
5820
5821 As a special case, if an argument on the same line as the open
5822 parenthesis starts with a brace block opener, the indentation is
5823 @code{c-basic-offset} only. This is intended as a ``DWIM'' measure in
5824 cases like macros that contain statement blocks, e.g.:
5825
5826 @example
5827 @group
5828 A_VERY_LONG_MACRO_NAME (@{
5829 some (code, with + long, lines * in[it]);
5830 @});
5831 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5832 @end group
5833 @end example
5834
5835 This is motivated partly because it's more in line with how code
5836 blocks are handled, and partly since it approximates the behavior of
5837 earlier CC Mode versions, which due to inaccurate analysis tended to
5838 indent such cases this way.
5839
5840 @workswith @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, @code{arglist-close}.
5841 @end defun
5842
5843 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5844
5845 @defun c-lineup-arglist-intro-after-paren
5846 @findex lineup-arglist-intro-after-paren (c-)
5847 Line up a line to just after the open paren of the surrounding paren or
5848 brace block.
5849
5850 @workswith @code{defun-block-intro}, @code{brace-list-intro},
5851 @code{statement-block-intro}, @code{statement-case-intro},
5852 @code{arglist-intro}.
5853 @end defun
5854
5855 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5856
5857 @defun c-lineup-multi-inher
5858 @findex lineup-multi-inher (c-)
5859 Line up the classes in C++ multiple inheritance clauses and member
5860 initializers under each other. E.g.:
5861
5862 @example
5863 @group
5864 Foo::Foo (int a, int b):
5865 Cyphr (a),
5866 Bar (b) @hereFn{c-lineup-multi-inher}
5867 @end group
5868 @end example
5869
5870 @noindent
5871 and
5872
5873 @example
5874 @group
5875 class Foo
5876 : public Cyphr,
5877 public Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-multi-inher}
5878 @end group
5879 @end example
5880
5881 @noindent
5882 and
5883
5884 @example
5885 @group
5886 Foo::Foo (int a, int b)
5887 : Cyphr (a)
5888 , Bar (b) @hereFn{c-lineup-multi-inher}
5889 @end group
5890 @end example
5891
5892 @workswith @code{inher-cont}, @code{member-init-cont}.
5893 @end defun
5894
5895 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5896
5897 @defun c-lineup-java-inher
5898 @findex lineup-java-inher (c-)
5899 Line up Java implements and extends declarations. If class names
5900 follow on the same line as the @samp{implements}/@samp{extends}
5901 keyword, they are lined up under each other. Otherwise, they are
5902 indented by adding @code{c-basic-offset} to the column of the keyword.
5903 E.g.:
5904
5905 @example
5906 @group
5907 class Foo
5908 extends
5909 Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-java-inher}
5910 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5911 @end group
5912 @end example
5913
5914 @noindent
5915 and
5916
5917 @example
5918 @group
5919 class Foo
5920 extends Cyphr,
5921 Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-java-inher}
5922 @end group
5923 @end example
5924
5925 @workswith @code{inher-cont}.
5926 @end defun
5927
5928 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5929
5930 @defun c-lineup-java-throws
5931 @findex lineup-java-throws (c-)
5932 Line up Java throws declarations. If exception names follow on the
5933 same line as the throws keyword, they are lined up under each other.
5934 Otherwise, they are indented by adding @code{c-basic-offset} to the
5935 column of the @samp{throws} keyword. The @samp{throws} keyword itself
5936 is also indented by @code{c-basic-offset} from the function declaration
5937 start if it doesn't hang. E.g.:
5938
5939 @example
5940 @group
5941 int foo()
5942 throws @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
5943 Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
5944 @sssTsssTBasicOffset{}
5945 @end group
5946 @end example
5947
5948 @noindent
5949 and
5950
5951 @example
5952 @group
5953 int foo() throws Cyphr,
5954 Bar, @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
5955 Vlod @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
5956 @end group
5957 @end example
5958
5959 @workswith @code{func-decl-cont}.
5960 @end defun
5961
5962 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5963
5964 @defun c-lineup-template-args
5965 @findex lineup-template-args (c-)
5966 Line up the arguments of a template argument list under each other, but
5967 only in the case where the first argument is on the same line as the
5968 opening @samp{<}.
5969
5970 To allow this function to be used in a list expression, @code{nil} is
5971 returned if there's no template argument on the first line.
5972
5973 @workswith @code{template-args-cont}.
5974 @end defun
5975
5976 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5977
5978 @defun c-lineup-ObjC-method-call
5979 @findex lineup-ObjC-method-call (c-)
5980 For Objective-C code, line up selector args as Emacs Lisp mode does
5981 with function args: go to the position right after the message receiver,
5982 and if you are at the end of the line, indent the current line
5983 c-basic-offset columns from the opening bracket; otherwise you are
5984 looking at the first character of the first method call argument, so
5985 lineup the current line with it.
5986
5987 @workswith @code{objc-method-call-cont}.
5988 @end defun
5989
5990 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5991
5992 @defun c-lineup-ObjC-method-args
5993 @findex lineup-ObjC-method-args (c-)
5994 For Objective-C code, line up the colons that separate args. The colon
5995 on the current line is aligned with the one on the first line.
5996
5997 @workswith @code{objc-method-args-cont}.
5998 @end defun
5999
6000 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6001
6002 @defun c-lineup-ObjC-method-args-2
6003 @findex lineup-ObjC-method-args-2 (c-)
6004 Similar to @code{c-lineup-ObjC-method-args} but lines up the colon on
6005 the current line with the colon on the previous line.
6006
6007 @workswith @code{objc-method-args-cont}.
6008 @end defun
6009
6010 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6011 @node Operator Line-Up, Comment Line-Up, List Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
6012 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6013 @subsection Operator Line-Up Functions
6014 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6015
6016 The line-up functions here calculate the indentation for lines which
6017 start with an operator, by lining it up with something on the previous
6018 line.
6019
6020 @defun c-lineup-argcont
6021 @findex lineup-argcont (c-)
6022 Line up a continued argument. E.g.:
6023
6024 @example
6025 @group
6026 foo (xyz, aaa + bbb + ccc
6027 + ddd + eee + fff); @hereFn{c-lineup-argcont}
6028 @end group
6029 @end example
6030
6031 Only continuation lines like this are touched, @code{nil} is returned on
6032 lines which are the start of an argument.
6033
6034 Within a gcc @code{asm} block, @code{:} is recognized as an argument
6035 separator, but of course only between operand specifications, not in the
6036 expressions for the operands.
6037
6038 @workswith @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6039 @end defun
6040
6041 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6042
6043 @defun c-lineup-arglist-operators
6044 @findex lineup-arglist-operators (c-)
6045 Line up lines starting with an infix operator under the open paren.
6046 Return @code{nil} on lines that don't start with an operator, to leave
6047 those cases to other line-up functions. Example:
6048
6049 @example
6050 @group
6051 if ( x < 10
6052 || at_limit (x, @hereFn{c-lineup-arglist-operators}
6053 list) @hereFn{c-lineup-arglist-operators@r{ returns nil}}
6054 )
6055 @end group
6056 @end example
6057
6058 Since this function doesn't do anything for lines without an infix
6059 operator you typically want to use it together with some other lineup
6060 settings, e.g., as follows (the @code{arglist-close} setting is just a
6061 suggestion to get a consistent style):
6062
6063 @example
6064 (c-set-offset 'arglist-cont
6065 '(c-lineup-arglist-operators 0))
6066 (c-set-offset 'arglist-cont-nonempty
6067 '(c-lineup-arglist-operators c-lineup-arglist))
6068 (c-set-offset 'arglist-close
6069 '(c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren))
6070 @end example
6071
6072 @workswith @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6073 @end defun
6074
6075 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6076
6077 @defun c-lineup-assignments
6078 @findex lineup-assignments (c-)
6079 Line up the current line after the assignment operator on the first line
6080 in the statement. If there isn't any, return @code{nil} to allow stacking with
6081 other line-up functions. If the current line contains an assignment
6082 operator too, try to align it with the first one.
6083
6084 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
6085 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6086
6087 @end defun
6088
6089 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6090
6091 @defun c-lineup-math
6092 @findex lineup-math (c-)
6093 Like @code{c-lineup-assignments} but indent with @code{c-basic-offset}
6094 if no assignment operator was found on the first line. I.e., this
6095 function is the same as specifying a list @code{(c-lineup-assignments
6096 +)}. It's provided for compatibility with old configurations.
6097
6098 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
6099 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6100 @end defun
6101
6102 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6103
6104 @defun c-lineup-cascaded-calls
6105 @findex lineup-cascaded-calls (c-)
6106 Line up ``cascaded calls'' under each other. If the line begins with
6107 @code{->} or @code{.} and the preceding line ends with one or more
6108 function calls preceded by the same token, then the arrow is lined up
6109 with the first of those tokens. E.g.:
6110
6111 @example
6112 @group
6113 r = proc->add(17)->add(18)
6114 ->add(19) + @hereFn{c-lineup-cascaded-calls}
6115 offset; @hereFn{c-lineup-cascaded-calls@r{ (inactive)}}
6116 @end group
6117 @end example
6118
6119 In any other situation @code{nil} is returned to allow use in list
6120 expressions.
6121
6122 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
6123 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6124 @end defun
6125
6126 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6127
6128 @defun c-lineup-streamop
6129 @findex lineup-streamop (c-)
6130 Line up C++ stream operators (i.e., @samp{<<} and @samp{>>}).
6131
6132 @workswith @code{stream-op}.
6133 @end defun
6134
6135 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6136
6137 @defun c-lineup-string-cont
6138 @findex lineup-string-cont (c-)
6139 Line up a continued string under the one it continues. A continued
6140 string in this sense is where a string literal follows directly after
6141 another one. E.g.:
6142
6143 @example
6144 @group
6145 result = prefix + "A message "
6146 "string."; @hereFn{c-lineup-string-cont}
6147 @end group
6148 @end example
6149
6150 @code{nil} is returned in other situations, to allow stacking with other
6151 lineup functions.
6152
6153 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
6154 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6155 @end defun
6156
6157
6158 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6159 @node Comment Line-Up, Misc Line-Up, Operator Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
6160 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6161 @subsection Comment Line-Up Functions
6162 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6163
6164 The lineup functions here calculate the indentation for several types
6165 of comment structure.
6166
6167 @defun c-lineup-C-comments
6168 @findex lineup-C-comments (c-)
6169 Line up C block comment continuation lines. Various heuristics are used
6170 to handle most of the common comment styles. Some examples:
6171
6172 @example
6173 @group
6174 /* /** /*
6175 * text * text text
6176 */ */ */
6177 @end group
6178 @end example
6179
6180 @example
6181 @group
6182 /* text /* /**
6183 text ** text ** text
6184 */ */ */
6185 @end group
6186 @end example
6187
6188 @example
6189 @group
6190 /**************************************************
6191 * text
6192 *************************************************/
6193 @end group
6194 @end example
6195
6196 @vindex comment-start-skip
6197 @example
6198 @group
6199 /**************************************************
6200 Free form text comments:
6201 In comments with a long delimiter line at the
6202 start, the indentation is kept unchanged for lines
6203 that start with an empty comment line prefix. The
6204 delimiter line is whatever matches the
6205 @code{comment-start-skip} regexp.
6206 **************************************************/
6207 @end group
6208 @end example
6209
6210 The style variable @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} is used to recognize
6211 the comment line prefix, e.g., the @samp{*} that usually starts every
6212 line inside a comment.
6213
6214 @workswith The @code{c} syntactic symbol.
6215 @end defun
6216
6217 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6218
6219 @defun c-lineup-comment
6220 @findex lineup-comment (c-)
6221 Line up a comment-only line according to the style variable
6222 @code{c-comment-only-line-offset}. If the comment is lined up with a
6223 comment starter on the previous line, that alignment is preserved.
6224
6225 @defopt c-comment-only-line-offset
6226 @vindex comment-only-line-offset (c-)
6227 This style variable specifies the extra offset for the line. It can
6228 contain an integer or a cons cell of the form
6229
6230 @example
6231 (@r{@var{non-anchored-offset}} . @r{@var{anchored-offset}})
6232 @end example
6233
6234 @noindent
6235 where @var{non-anchored-offset} is the amount of offset given to
6236 non-column-zero anchored lines, and @var{anchored-offset} is the amount
6237 of offset to give column-zero anchored lines. Just an integer as value
6238 is equivalent to @code{(@r{@var{value}} . -1000)}.
6239 @end defopt
6240
6241 @workswith @code{comment-intro}.
6242 @end defun
6243
6244 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6245
6246 @defun c-lineup-knr-region-comment
6247 @findex lineup-knr-region-comment (c-)
6248 Line up a comment in the ``K&R region'' with the declaration. That is
6249 the region between the function or class header and the beginning of the
6250 block. E.g.:
6251
6252 @example
6253 @group
6254 int main()
6255 /* Called at startup. */ @hereFn{c-lineup-knr-region-comment}
6256 @{
6257 return 0;
6258 @}
6259 @end group
6260 @end example
6261
6262 Return @code{nil} if called in any other situation, to be useful in list
6263 expressions.
6264
6265 @workswith @code{comment-intro}.
6266 @end defun
6267
6268 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6269 @node Misc Line-Up, , Comment Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
6270 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6271 @subsection Miscellaneous Line-Up Functions
6272 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6273
6274 The line-up functions here are the odds and ends which didn't fit into
6275 any earlier category.
6276
6277 @defun c-lineup-dont-change
6278 @findex lineup-dont-change (c-)
6279 This lineup function makes the line stay at whatever indentation it
6280 already has; think of it as an identity function for lineups.
6281
6282 @workswith Any syntactic symbol.
6283 @end defun
6284
6285 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6286
6287 @defun c-lineup-cpp-define
6288 @findex lineup-cpp-define (c-)
6289 Line up macro continuation lines according to the indentation of the
6290 construct preceding the macro. E.g.:
6291
6292 @example
6293 @group
6294 const char msg[] = @hereFn{@r{The beginning of the preceding construct.}}
6295 \"Some text.\";
6296
6297 #define X(A, B) \
6298 do @{ \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6299 printf (A, B); \
6300 @} while (0)
6301 @end group
6302 @end example
6303
6304 @noindent
6305 and:
6306
6307 @example
6308 @group
6309 int dribble() @{
6310 if (!running) @hereFn{@r{The beginning of the preceding construct.}}
6311 error(\"Not running!\");
6312
6313 #define X(A, B) \
6314 do @{ \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6315 printf (A, B); \
6316 @} while (0)
6317 @end group
6318 @end example
6319
6320 If @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is non-@code{nil}, the
6321 function returns the relative indentation to the macro start line to
6322 allow accumulation with other offsets. E.g., in the following cases,
6323 @code{cpp-define-intro} is combined with the
6324 @code{statement-block-intro} that comes from the @samp{do @{} that hangs
6325 on the @samp{#define} line:
6326
6327 @example
6328 @group
6329 const char msg[] =
6330 \"Some text.\";
6331
6332 #define X(A, B) do @{ \
6333 printf (A, B); \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6334 this->refs++; \
6335 @} while (0) @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6336 @end group
6337 @end example
6338
6339 @noindent
6340 and:
6341
6342 @example
6343 @group
6344 int dribble() @{
6345 if (!running)
6346 error(\"Not running!\");
6347
6348 #define X(A, B) do @{ \
6349 printf (A, B); \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6350 this->refs++; \
6351 @} while (0) @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6352 @end group
6353 @end example
6354
6355 The relative indentation returned by @code{c-lineup-cpp-define} is zero
6356 and two, respectively, on the two lines in each of these examples. They
6357 are then added to the two column indentation that
6358 @code{statement-block-intro} gives in both cases here.
6359
6360 If the relative indentation is zero, then @code{nil} is returned
6361 instead. That is useful in a list expression to specify the default
6362 indentation on the top level.
6363
6364 If @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is @code{nil} then this
6365 function keeps the current indentation, except for empty lines (ignoring
6366 the ending backslash) where it takes the indentation from the closest
6367 preceding nonempty line in the macro. If there's no such line in the
6368 macro then the indentation is taken from the construct preceding it, as
6369 described above.
6370
6371 @workswith @code{cpp-define-intro}.
6372 @end defun
6373
6374 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6375
6376 @defun c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg
6377 @findex lineup-gcc-asm-reg (c-)
6378 Line up a gcc asm register under one on a previous line.
6379
6380 @example
6381 @group
6382 asm ("foo %1, %0\n"
6383 "bar %0, %1"
6384 : "=r" (w),
6385 "=r" (x)
6386 : "0" (y),
6387 "1" (z));
6388 @end group
6389 @end example
6390
6391 The @samp{x} line is aligned to the text after the @samp{:} on the
6392 @samp{w} line, and similarly @samp{z} under @samp{y}.
6393
6394 This is done only in an @samp{asm} or @samp{__asm__} block, and only to
6395 those lines mentioned. Anywhere else @code{nil} is returned. The usual
6396 arrangement is to have this routine as an extra feature at the start of
6397 arglist lineups, e.g.:
6398
6399 @example
6400 (c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg c-lineup-arglist)
6401 @end example
6402
6403 @workswith @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6404 @end defun
6405
6406 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6407
6408 @defun c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont
6409 @findex lineup-topmost-intro-cont (c-)
6410 Line up declaration continuation lines zero or one indentation
6411 step@footnote{This function is mainly provided to mimic the behavior of
6412 CC Mode 5.28 and earlier where this case wasn't handled consistently so
6413 that those lines could be analyzed as either topmost-intro-cont or
6414 statement-cont. It's used for @code{topmost-intro-cont} by default, but
6415 you might consider using @code{+} instead.}. For lines preceding a
6416 definition, zero is used. For other lines, @code{c-basic-offset} is
6417 added to the indentation. E.g.:
6418
6419 @example
6420 @group
6421 int
6422 neg (int i) @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6423 @{
6424 return -i;
6425 @}
6426 @end group
6427 @end example
6428
6429 @noindent
6430 and
6431
6432 @example
6433 @group
6434 struct
6435 larch @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6436 @{
6437 double height;
6438 @}
6439 the_larch, @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6440 another_larch; @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6441 @sssTBasicOffset{}
6442 @end group
6443 @end example
6444
6445 @noindent
6446 and
6447
6448 @example
6449 @group
6450 struct larch
6451 the_larch, @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6452 another_larch; @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6453 @end group
6454 @end example
6455
6456 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}.
6457 @end defun
6458
6459 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6460 @node Custom Line-Up, Other Indentation, Line-Up Functions, Customizing Indentation
6461 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6462 @section Custom Line-Up Functions
6463 @cindex customization, indentation functions
6464 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6465
6466 The most flexible way to customize indentation is by writing custom
6467 line-up functions, and associating them with specific syntactic
6468 symbols (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}). Depending on the effect you want,
6469 it might be better to write a @code{c-special-indent-hook} function
6470 rather than a line-up function (@pxref{Other Indentation}).
6471
6472 @ccmode{} comes with an extensive set of predefined line-up functions,
6473 not all of which are used by the default styles. So there's a good
6474 chance the function you want already exists. @xref{Line-Up
6475 Functions}, for a list of them. If you write your own line-up
6476 function, it's probably a good idea to start working from one of these
6477 predefined functions, which can be found in the file
6478 @file{cc-align.el}. If you have written a line-up function that you
6479 think is generally useful, you're very welcome to contribute it;
6480 please contact @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}.
6481
6482 Line-up functions are passed a single argument, the syntactic
6483 element (see below). At the time of the call, point will be somewhere
6484 on the line being indented. The return value is a
6485 @code{c-offsets-alist} offset specification: for example, an integer,
6486 a symbol such as @code{+}, a vector, @code{nil}@footnote{Returning
6487 @code{nil} is useful when the offset specification for a syntactic
6488 element is a list containing the line-up function
6489 (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}).}, or even another line-up function. Full
6490 details of these are in @ref{c-offsets-alist}.
6491
6492 Line-up functions must not move point or change the content of the
6493 buffer (except temporarily). They are however allowed to do
6494 @dfn{hidden buffer changes}, i.e., setting text properties for caching
6495 purposes etc. Buffer undo recording is disabled while they run.
6496
6497 The syntactic element passed as the parameter to a line-up function is
6498 a cons cell of the form
6499
6500 @example
6501 (@r{@var{syntactic-symbol}} . @r{@var{anchor-position}})
6502 @end example
6503
6504 @noindent
6505 @c FIXME!!! The following sentence might be better omitted, since the
6506 @c information is in the cross reference "Syntactic Analysis". 2005/10/2.
6507 where @var{syntactic-symbol} is the symbol that the function was
6508 called for, and @var{anchor-position} is the anchor position (if any)
6509 for the construct that triggered the syntactic symbol
6510 (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis}). This cons cell is how the syntactic
6511 element of a line used to be represented in @ccmode{} 5.28 and
6512 earlier. Line-up functions are still passed this cons cell, so as to
6513 preserve compatibility with older configurations. In the future, we
6514 may decide to convert to using the full list format---you can prepare
6515 your setup for this by using the access functions
6516 (@code{c-langelem-sym}, etc.)@: described below.
6517
6518 @vindex c-syntactic-element
6519 @vindex syntactic-element (c-)
6520 @vindex c-syntactic-context
6521 @vindex syntactic-context (c-)
6522 Some syntactic symbols, e.g., @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, have more
6523 info in the syntactic element: typically other positions that can be
6524 interesting besides the anchor position. That info can't be accessed
6525 through the passed argument, which is a cons cell. Instead, you can
6526 get this information from the variable @code{c-syntactic-element},
6527 which is dynamically bound to the complete syntactic element. The
6528 variable @code{c-syntactic-context} might also be useful: it gets
6529 dynamically bound to the complete syntactic context. @xref{Custom
6530 Braces}.
6531
6532 @ccmode{} provides a few functions to access parts of syntactic
6533 elements in a more abstract way. Besides making the code easier to
6534 read, they also hide the difference between the old cons cell form
6535 used in the line-up function argument and the new list form used in
6536 @code{c-syntactic-element} and everywhere else. The functions are:
6537
6538 @defun c-langelem-sym langelem
6539 @findex langelem-sym (c-)
6540 Return the syntactic symbol in @var{langelem}.
6541 @end defun
6542
6543 @defun c-langelem-pos langelem
6544 @findex langelem-pos (c-)
6545 Return the anchor position in @var{langelem}, or @code{nil} if there is none.
6546 @end defun
6547
6548 @defun c-langelem-col langelem &optional preserve-point
6549 @findex langelem-col (c-)
6550 Return the column of the anchor position in @var{langelem}. Also move
6551 the point to that position unless @var{preserve-point} is
6552 non-@code{nil}.
6553 @end defun
6554
6555 @defun c-langelem-2nd-pos langelem
6556 @findex langelem-2nd-pos (c-)
6557 Return the secondary position in @var{langelem}, or @code{nil} if there
6558 is none.
6559
6560 Note that the return value of this function is always @code{nil} if
6561 @var{langelem} is in the old cons cell form. Thus this function is
6562 only meaningful when used on syntactic elements taken from
6563 @code{c-syntactic-element} or @code{c-syntactic-context}.
6564 @end defun
6565
6566 Sometimes you may need to use the syntactic context of a line other
6567 than the one being indented. You can determine this by (temporarily)
6568 moving point onto this line and calling @code{c-guess-basic-syntax}
6569 (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis}).
6570
6571 Custom line-up functions can be as simple or as complex as you like, and
6572 any syntactic symbol that appears in @code{c-offsets-alist} can have a
6573 custom line-up function associated with it.
6574
6575 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6576 @node Other Indentation, , Custom Line-Up, Customizing Indentation
6577 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6578 @section Other Special Indentations
6579 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6580
6581 To configure macros which you invoke without a terminating @samp{;},
6582 see @xref{Macros with ;}.
6583
6584 Here are the remaining odds and ends regarding indentation:
6585
6586 @defopt c-label-minimum-indentation
6587 @vindex label-minimum-indentation (c-)
6588 In @samp{gnu} style (@pxref{Built-in Styles}), a minimum indentation is
6589 imposed on lines inside code blocks. This minimum indentation is
6590 controlled by this style variable. The default value is 1.
6591
6592 @findex c-gnu-impose-minimum
6593 @findex gnu-impose-minimum (c-)
6594 It's the function @code{c-gnu-impose-minimum} that enforces this minimum
6595 indentation. It must be present on @code{c-special-indent-hook} to
6596 work.
6597 @end defopt
6598
6599 @defopt c-special-indent-hook
6600 @vindex special-indent-hook (c-)
6601 This style variable is a standard hook variable that is called after
6602 every line is indented by @ccmode{}. It is called only if
6603 @code{c-syntactic-indentation} is non-@code{nil} (which it is by
6604 default (@pxref{Indentation Engine Basics})). You can put a function
6605 on this hook to do any special indentation or ad hoc line adjustments
6606 your style dictates, such as adding extra indentation to constructors
6607 or destructor declarations in a class definition, etc. Sometimes it
6608 is better to write a custom Line-up Function instead (@pxref{Custom
6609 Line-Up}).
6610
6611 When the indentation engine calls this hook, the variable
6612 @code{c-syntactic-context} is bound to the current syntactic context
6613 (i.e., what you would get by typing @kbd{C-c C-s} on the source line.
6614 @xref{Custom Braces}.). Note that you should not change point or mark
6615 inside a @code{c-special-indent-hook} function, i.e., you'll probably
6616 want to wrap your function in a @code{save-excursion}@footnote{The
6617 numerical value returned by @code{point} will change if you change the
6618 indentation of the line within a @code{save-excursion} form, but point
6619 itself will still be over the same piece of text.}.
6620
6621 Setting @code{c-special-indent-hook} in style definitions is handled
6622 slightly differently from other variables---A style can only add
6623 functions to this hook, not remove them. @xref{Style Variables}.
6624 @end defopt
6625
6626
6627 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6628 @node Custom Macros, Odds and Ends, Customizing Indentation, Top
6629 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6630 @chapter Customizing Macros
6631 @cindex macros
6632 @cindex preprocessor directives
6633 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6634
6635 Preprocessor macros in C, C++, and Objective C (introduced by
6636 @code{#define}) have a syntax different from the main language---for
6637 example, a macro declaration is not terminated by a semicolon, and if
6638 it is more than a line long, line breaks in it must be escaped with
6639 backslashes. @ccmode{} has some commands to manipulate these, see
6640 @ref{Macro Backslashes}.
6641
6642 Normally, the lines in a multi-line macro are indented relative to
6643 each other as though they were code. You can suppress this behavior
6644 by setting the following user option:
6645
6646 @defopt c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros
6647 @vindex syntactic-indentation-in-macros (c-)
6648 Enable syntactic analysis inside macros, which is the default. If this
6649 is @code{nil}, all lines inside macro definitions are analyzed as
6650 @code{cpp-macro-cont}.
6651 @end defopt
6652
6653 Because a macro can expand into anything at all, near where one is
6654 invoked @ccmode{} can only indent and fontify code heuristically.
6655 Sometimes it gets it wrong. Usually you should try to design your
6656 macros so that they ''look like ordinary code'' when you invoke them.
6657 However, one situation is so common that @ccmode{} handles it
6658 specially: that is when certain macros needn't (or mustn't) be
6659 followed by a @samp{;}. You need to configure @ccmode{} to handle
6660 these macros properly, see @ref{Macros with ;}.
6661
6662 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6663 @menu
6664 * Macro Backslashes::
6665 * Macros with ;::
6666 @end menu
6667
6668 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6669 @node Macro Backslashes, Macros with ;, Custom Macros, Custom Macros
6670 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6671 @section Customizing Macro Backslashes
6672 @cindex @code{#define}
6673 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6674
6675 @ccmode{} provides some tools to help keep the line continuation
6676 backslashes in macros neat and tidy. Their precise action is
6677 customized with these variables:
6678
6679 @defopt c-backslash-column
6680 @vindex backslash-column (c-)
6681 @defoptx c-backslash-max-column
6682 @vindex backslash-max-column (c-)
6683 These variables control the alignment columns for line continuation
6684 backslashes in multiline macros. They are used by the functions that
6685 automatically insert or align such backslashes,
6686 e.g., @code{c-backslash-region} and @code{c-context-line-break}.
6687
6688 @code{c-backslash-column} specifies the minimum column for the
6689 backslashes. If any line in the macro goes past this column, then the
6690 next tab stop (i.e., next multiple of @code{tab-width}) in that line is
6691 used as the alignment column for all the backslashes, so that they
6692 remain in a single column. However, if any lines go past
6693 @code{c-backslash-max-column} then the backslashes in the rest of the
6694 macro will be kept at that column, so that the lines which are too
6695 long ``stick out'' instead.
6696
6697 Don't ever set these variables to @code{nil}. If you want to disable
6698 the automatic alignment of backslashes, use
6699 @code{c-auto-align-backslashes}.
6700 @end defopt
6701
6702 @defopt c-auto-align-backslashes
6703 @vindex auto-align-backslashes (c-)
6704 Align automatically inserted line continuation backslashes if
6705 non-@code{nil}. When line continuation backslashes are inserted
6706 automatically for line breaks in multiline macros, e.g., by
6707 @code{c-context-line-break}, they are aligned with the other
6708 backslashes in the same macro if this flag is set.
6709
6710 If @code{c-auto-align-backslashes} is @code{nil}, automatically
6711 inserted backslashes are preceded by a single space, and backslashes
6712 get aligned only when you explicitly invoke the command
6713 @code{c-backslash-region} (@kbd{C-c C-\}).
6714 @end defopt
6715
6716 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6717 @node Macros with ;, , Macro Backslashes, Custom Macros
6718 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6719 @section Macros with semicolons
6720 @cindex macros with semicolons
6721 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6722 Macros which needn't (or mustn't) be followed by a semicolon when you
6723 invoke them, @dfn{macros with semicolons}, are very common. These can
6724 cause @ccmode{} to parse the next line wrongly as a
6725 @code{statement-cont} (@pxref{Function Symbols}) and thus mis-indent
6726 it.
6727
6728 You can prevent this by specifying which macros have semicolons. It
6729 doesn't matter whether or not such a macro has a parameter list:
6730
6731 @defopt c-macro-names-with-semicolon
6732 @vindex macro-names-with-semicolon (c-)
6733 This buffer-local variable specifies which macros have semicolons.
6734 After setting its value, you need to call
6735 @code{c-make-macro-with-semi-re} for it to take effect. It should be
6736 set to one of these values:
6737
6738 @table @asis
6739 @item nil
6740 There are no macros with semicolons.
6741 @item a list of strings
6742 Each string is the name of a macro with a semicolon. Only valid
6743 @code{#define} names are allowed here. For example, to set the
6744 default value, you could write the following into your @file{.emacs}:
6745
6746 @example
6747 (setq c-macro-names-with-semicolon
6748 '("Q_OBJECT" "Q_PROPERTY" "Q_DECLARE" "Q_ENUMS"))
6749 @end example
6750
6751 @item a regular expression
6752 This matches each symbol which is a macro with a semicolon. It must
6753 not match any string which isn't a valid @code{#define} name. For
6754 example:
6755
6756 @example
6757 (setq c-macro-names-with-semicolon
6758 "\\<\\(CLEAN_UP_AND_RETURN\\|Q_[[:upper:]]+\\)\\>")
6759 @end example
6760 @end table
6761 @end defopt
6762
6763 @defun c-make-macro-with-semi-re
6764 @findex make-macro-with-semi-re (c-)
6765 Call this (non-interactive) function, which sets internal variables,
6766 each time you change the value of
6767 @code{c-macro-names-with-semicolon}. It takes no arguments, and its
6768 return value has no meaning. This function is called by @ccmode{}'s
6769 initialization code.
6770 @end defun
6771
6772 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6773 @node Odds and Ends, Sample Init File, Custom Macros, Top
6774 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6775 @chapter Odds and Ends
6776 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6777
6778 The stuff that didn't fit in anywhere else is documented here.
6779
6780 @defopt c-require-final-newline
6781 @vindex require-final-newline (c-)
6782 Controls whether a final newline is enforced when the file is saved.
6783 The value is an association list that for each language mode specifies
6784 the value to give to @code{require-final-newline} (@pxref{Saving
6785 Buffers,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}) at mode initialization. If a
6786 language isn't present on the association list, CC Mode won't touch
6787 @code{require-final-newline} in buffers for that language.
6788
6789 The default is to set @code{require-final-newline} to @code{t} in the
6790 languages that mandate that source files should end with newlines.
6791 These are C, C++ and Objective-C.
6792 @end defopt
6793
6794 @defopt c-echo-syntactic-information-p
6795 @vindex echo-syntactic-information-p (c-)
6796 If non-@code{nil}, the syntactic analysis for the current line is shown
6797 in the echo area when it's indented (unless
6798 @code{c-syntactic-indentation} is @code{nil}). That's useful when
6799 finding out which syntactic symbols to modify to get the indentation you
6800 want.
6801 @end defopt
6802
6803 @defopt c-report-syntactic-errors
6804 @vindex report-syntactic-errors (c-)
6805 If non-@code{nil}, certain syntactic errors are reported with a ding and
6806 a message, for example when an @code{else} is indented for which there
6807 is no corresponding @code{if}.
6808
6809 Note however that @ccmode{} doesn't make any special effort to check for
6810 syntactic errors; that's the job of the compiler. The reason it can
6811 report cases like the one above is that it can't find the correct
6812 anchoring position to indent the line in that case.
6813 @end defopt
6814
6815
6816 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6817 @node Sample Init File, Performance Issues, Odds and Ends, Top
6818 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6819 @appendix Sample Init File
6820 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6821
6822 Here's a sample .emacs file fragment that might help you along the way.
6823 Just copy this region and paste it into your .emacs file. You might want
6824 to change some of the actual values.
6825
6826 @verbatim
6827 ;; Make a non-standard key binding. We can put this in
6828 ;; c-mode-base-map because c-mode-map, c++-mode-map, and so on,
6829 ;; inherit from it.
6830 (defun my-c-initialization-hook ()
6831 (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-m" 'c-context-line-break))
6832 (add-hook 'c-initialization-hook 'my-c-initialization-hook)
6833
6834 ;; offset customizations not in my-c-style
6835 ;; This will take precedence over any setting of the syntactic symbol
6836 ;; made by a style.
6837 (setq c-offsets-alist '((member-init-intro . ++)))
6838
6839 ;; Create my personal style.
6840 (defconst my-c-style
6841 '((c-tab-always-indent . t)
6842 (c-comment-only-line-offset . 4)
6843 (c-hanging-braces-alist . ((substatement-open after)
6844 (brace-list-open)))
6845 (c-hanging-colons-alist . ((member-init-intro before)
6846 (inher-intro)
6847 (case-label after)
6848 (label after)
6849 (access-label after)))
6850 (c-cleanup-list . (scope-operator
6851 empty-defun-braces
6852 defun-close-semi))
6853 (c-offsets-alist . ((arglist-close . c-lineup-arglist)
6854 (substatement-open . 0)
6855 (case-label . 4)
6856 (block-open . 0)
6857 (knr-argdecl-intro . -)))
6858 (c-echo-syntactic-information-p . t))
6859 "My C Programming Style")
6860 (c-add-style "PERSONAL" my-c-style)
6861
6862 ;; Customizations for all modes in CC Mode.
6863 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook ()
6864 ;; set my personal style for the current buffer
6865 (c-set-style "PERSONAL")
6866 ;; other customizations
6867 (setq tab-width 8
6868 ;; this will make sure spaces are used instead of tabs
6869 indent-tabs-mode nil)
6870 ;; we like auto-newline, but not hungry-delete
6871 (c-toggle-auto-newline 1))
6872 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook)
6873 @end verbatim
6874
6875 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6876 @node Performance Issues, Limitations and Known Bugs, Sample Init File, Top
6877 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6878 @appendix Performance Issues
6879 @cindex performance
6880 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6881
6882 @comment FIXME: (ACM, 2003/5/24). Check whether AWK needs mentioning here.
6883
6884 C and its derivative languages are highly complex creatures. Often,
6885 ambiguous code situations arise that require @ccmode{} to scan large
6886 portions of the buffer to determine syntactic context. Such
6887 pathological code can cause @ccmode{} to perform fairly badly. This
6888 section gives some insight in how @ccmode{} operates, how that interacts
6889 with some coding styles, and what you can use to improve performance.
6890
6891 The overall goal is that @ccmode{} shouldn't be overly slow (i.e., take
6892 more than a fraction of a second) in any interactive operation.
6893 I.e., it's tuned to limit the maximum response time in single operations,
6894 which is sometimes at the expense of batch-like operations like
6895 reindenting whole blocks. If you find that @ccmode{} gradually gets
6896 slower and slower in certain situations, perhaps as the file grows in
6897 size or as the macro or comment you're editing gets bigger, then chances
6898 are that something isn't working right. You should consider reporting
6899 it, unless it's something that's mentioned in this section.
6900
6901 Because @ccmode{} has to scan the buffer backwards from the current
6902 insertion point, and because C's syntax is fairly difficult to parse in
6903 the backwards direction, @ccmode{} often tries to find the nearest
6904 position higher up in the buffer from which to begin a forward scan
6905 (it's typically an opening or closing parenthesis of some kind). The
6906 farther this position is from the current insertion point, the slower it
6907 gets.
6908
6909 @findex beginning-of-defun
6910 In earlier versions of @ccmode{}, we used to recommend putting the
6911 opening brace of a top-level construct@footnote{E.g., a function in C,
6912 or outermost class definition in C++ or Java.} into the leftmost
6913 column. Earlier still, this used to be a rigid Emacs constraint, as
6914 embodied in the @code{beginning-of-defun} function. @ccmode now
6915 caches syntactic information much better, so that the delay caused by
6916 searching for such a brace when it's not in column 0 is minimal,
6917 except perhaps when you've just moved a long way inside the file.
6918
6919 @findex defun-prompt-regexp
6920 @vindex c-Java-defun-prompt-regexp
6921 @vindex Java-defun-prompt-regexp (c-)
6922 A special note about @code{defun-prompt-regexp} in Java mode: The common
6923 style is to hang the opening braces of functions and classes on the
6924 right side of the line, and that doesn't work well with the Emacs
6925 approach. @ccmode{} comes with a constant
6926 @code{c-Java-defun-prompt-regexp} which tries to define a regular
6927 expression usable for this style, but there are problems with it. In
6928 some cases it can cause @code{beginning-of-defun} to hang@footnote{This
6929 has been observed in Emacs 19.34 and XEmacs 19.15.}. For this reason,
6930 it is not used by default, but if you feel adventurous, you can set
6931 @code{defun-prompt-regexp} to it in your mode hook. In any event,
6932 setting and relying on @code{defun-prompt-regexp} will definitely slow
6933 things down because (X)Emacs will be doing regular expression searches a
6934 lot, so you'll probably be taking a hit either way!
6935
6936 @ccmode{} maintains a cache of the opening parentheses of the blocks
6937 surrounding the point, and it adapts that cache as the point is moved
6938 around. That means that in bad cases it can take noticeable time to
6939 indent a line in a new surrounding, but after that it gets fast as long
6940 as the point isn't moved far off. The farther the point is moved, the
6941 less useful is the cache. Since editing typically is done in ``chunks''
6942 rather than on single lines far apart from each other, the cache
6943 typically gives good performance even when the code doesn't fit the
6944 Emacs approach to finding the defun starts.
6945
6946 @vindex c-enable-xemacs-performance-kludge-p
6947 @vindex enable-xemacs-performance-kludge-p (c-)
6948 XEmacs users can set the variable
6949 @code{c-enable-xemacs-performance-kludge-p} to non-@code{nil}. This
6950 tells @ccmode{} to use XEmacs-specific built-in functions which, in some
6951 circumstances, can locate the top-most opening brace much more quickly than
6952 @code{beginning-of-defun}. Preliminary testing has shown that for
6953 styles where these braces are hung (e.g., most JDK-derived Java styles),
6954 this hack can improve performance of the core syntax parsing routines
6955 from 3 to 60 times. However, for styles which @emph{do} conform to
6956 Emacs's recommended style of putting top-level braces in column zero,
6957 this hack can degrade performance by about as much. Thus this variable
6958 is set to @code{nil} by default, since the Emacs-friendly styles should
6959 be more common (and encouraged!). Note that this variable has no effect
6960 in Emacs since the necessary built-in functions don't exist (in Emacs
6961 22.1 as of this writing in February 2007).
6962
6963 Text properties are used to speed up skipping over syntactic whitespace,
6964 i.e., comments and preprocessor directives. Indenting a line after a
6965 huge macro definition can be slow the first time, but after that the
6966 text properties are in place and it should be fast (even after you've
6967 edited other parts of the file and then moved back).
6968
6969 Font locking can be a CPU hog, especially the font locking done on
6970 decoration level 3 which tries to be very accurate. Note that that
6971 level is designed to be used with a font lock support mode that only
6972 fontifies the text that's actually shown, i.e., Lazy Lock or Just-in-time
6973 Lock mode, so make sure you use one of them. Fontification of a whole
6974 buffer with some thousand lines can often take over a minute. That is
6975 a known weakness; the idea is that it never should happen.
6976
6977 The most effective way to speed up font locking is to reduce the
6978 decoration level to 2 by setting @code{font-lock-maximum-decoration}
6979 appropriately. That level is designed to be as pretty as possible
6980 without sacrificing performance. @xref{Font Locking Preliminaries}, for
6981 more info.
6982
6983
6984 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6985 @node Limitations and Known Bugs, FAQ, Performance Issues, Top
6986 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6987 @appendix Limitations and Known Bugs
6988 @cindex limitations
6989 @cindex bugs
6990 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6991
6992 @itemize @bullet
6993 @item
6994 @ccmode{} doesn't support trigraphs. (These are character sequences
6995 such as @samp{??(}, which represents @samp{[}. They date from a time
6996 when some character sets didn't have all the characters that C needs,
6997 and are now utterly obsolete.)
6998
6999 @item
7000 There is no way to apply auto newline settings (@pxref{Auto-newlines})
7001 on already typed lines. That's only a feature to ease interactive
7002 editing.
7003
7004 To generalize this issue a bit: @ccmode{} is not intended to be used as
7005 a reformatter for old code in some more or less batch-like way. With
7006 the exception of some functions like @code{c-indent-region}, it's only
7007 geared to be used interactively to edit new code. There's currently no
7008 intention to change this goal.
7009
7010 If you want to reformat old code, you're probably better off using some
7011 other tool instead, e.g., @ref{Top, , GNU indent, indent, The `indent'
7012 Manual}, which has more powerful reformatting capabilities than
7013 @ccmode{}.
7014
7015 @item
7016 The support for C++ templates (in angle brackets) is not yet complete.
7017 When a non-nested template is used in a declaration, @ccmode{} indents
7018 it and font-locks it OK@. Templates used in expressions, and nested
7019 templates do not fare so well. Sometimes a workaround is to refontify
7020 the expression after typing the closing @samp{>}.
7021
7022 @item
7023 In a @dfn{k&r region} (the part of an old-fashioned C function
7024 declaration which specifies the types of its parameters, coming
7025 between the parameter list and the opening brace), there should be at
7026 most 20 top-level parenthesis and bracket pairs. This limit has been
7027 imposed for performance reasons. If it is violated, the source file
7028 might be incorrectly indented or fontified.
7029
7030 @item
7031 On loading @ccmode{}, sometimes this error message appears:
7032
7033 @example
7034 File mode specification error: (void-variable c-font-lock-keywords-3)
7035 @end example
7036
7037 This is due to a bug in the function @code{eval-after-load} in some
7038 versions of (X)Emacs. It can manifest itself when there is a symbolic
7039 link in the path of the directory which contains (X)Emacs. As a
7040 workaround, put the following into your @file{.emacs} file, fairly
7041 early on:
7042
7043 @example
7044 (defun my-load-cc-fonts ()
7045 (require "cc-fonts"))
7046 (add-hook 'c-initialization-hook 'my-load-cc-fonts)
7047 @end example
7048 @end itemize
7049
7050 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7051 @node FAQ, Updating CC Mode, Limitations and Known Bugs, Top
7052 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7053 @appendix Frequently Asked Questions
7054 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7055
7056 @itemize @bullet
7057 @item
7058 @emph{How can I change the indent level from 4 spaces to 2 spaces?}
7059
7060 Set the variable @code{c-basic-offset}. @xref{Getting Started}.
7061
7062 @item
7063 @kindex RET
7064 @kindex C-j
7065 @emph{Why does/doesn't the @kbd{RET} key indent the new line?}
7066
7067 Emacs's convention used to be that @kbd{RET} just adds a newline, and that
7068 @kbd{C-j} adds a newline and indents it. In Emacs-24.4, this convention was
7069 reversed.
7070
7071 If you use an older Emacs and you want @kbd{RET} do this
7072 too, add this to your @code{c-initialization-hook}:
7073
7074 @example
7075 (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-m" 'c-context-line-break)
7076 @end example
7077
7078 @xref{Getting Started}. This was a very common question.
7079
7080 @item
7081 @emph{How do I stop my code jumping all over the place when I type?}
7082
7083 Deactivate ``electric minor mode'' with @kbd{C-c C-l}. @xref{Getting
7084 Started}.
7085
7086 @item
7087 @kindex C-x h
7088 @kindex C-M-\
7089 @emph{How do I reindent the whole file?}
7090
7091 Visit the file and hit @kbd{C-x h} to mark the whole buffer. Then hit
7092 @kbd{C-M-\}. @xref{Indentation Commands}.
7093
7094 @item
7095 @kindex C-M-q
7096 @kindex C-M-u
7097 @emph{How do I reindent the current block?}
7098
7099 First move to the brace which opens the block with @kbd{C-M-u}, then
7100 reindent that expression with @kbd{C-M-q}. @xref{Indentation
7101 Commands}.
7102
7103 @item
7104 @emph{I put @code{(c-set-offset 'substatement-open 0)} in my
7105 @file{.emacs} file but I get an error saying that @code{c-set-offset}'s
7106 function definition is void. What's wrong?}
7107
7108 This means that @ccmode{} hasn't yet been loaded into your Emacs
7109 session by the time the @code{c-set-offset} call is reached, most
7110 likely because @ccmode{} is being autoloaded. Instead of putting the
7111 @code{c-set-offset} line in your top-level @file{.emacs} file, put it
7112 in your @code{c-initialization-hook} (@pxref{CC Hooks}), or simply
7113 modify @code{c-offsets-alist} directly:
7114
7115 @example
7116 (setq c-offsets-alist '((substatement-open . 0)))
7117 @end example
7118
7119 @item
7120 @cindex open paren in column zero
7121 @emph{I have an open paren character at column zero inside a comment or
7122 multiline string literal, and it causes the fontification and/or
7123 indentation to go haywire. What gives?}
7124
7125 It's due to the ad-hoc rule in (X)Emacs that such open parens always
7126 start defuns (which translates to functions, classes, namespaces or any
7127 other top-level block constructs in the @ccmode{} languages).
7128 @ifset XEMACS
7129 @xref{Defuns,,, xemacs, XEmacs User's Manual}, for details.
7130 @end ifset
7131 @ifclear XEMACS
7132 @xref{Left Margin Paren,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, for details
7133 (@xref{Defuns,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, in the Emacs 20 manual).
7134 @end ifclear
7135
7136 This heuristic is built into the core syntax analysis routines in
7137 (X)Emacs, so it's not really a @ccmode{} issue. However, in Emacs
7138 21.1 it became possible to turn it off@footnote{Using the variable
7139 @code{open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start}.} and @ccmode{} does so
7140 there since it's got its own system to keep track of blocks.
7141
7142 @end itemize
7143
7144
7145 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7146 @node Updating CC Mode, Mailing Lists and Bug Reports, FAQ, Top
7147 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7148 @appendix Getting the Latest CC Mode Release
7149 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7150
7151 @ccmode{} has been standard with all versions of Emacs since 19.34 and
7152 of XEmacs since 19.16.
7153
7154 @cindex web site
7155 Due to release schedule skew, it is likely that all of these Emacsen
7156 have old versions of @ccmode{} and so should be upgraded. Access to the
7157 @ccmode{} source code, as well as more detailed information on Emacsen
7158 compatibility, etc.@: are all available on the web site:
7159
7160 @quotation
7161 @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net/}
7162 @end quotation
7163
7164
7165 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7166 @node Mailing Lists and Bug Reports, GNU Free Documentation License, Updating CC Mode, Top
7167 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7168 @appendix Mailing Lists and Submitting Bug Reports
7169 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7170
7171 @kindex C-c C-b
7172 @findex c-submit-bug-report
7173 @findex submit-bug-report (c-)
7174 To report bugs, use the @kbd{C-c C-b} (bound to
7175 @code{c-submit-bug-report}) command. This provides vital information
7176 we need to reproduce your problem. Make sure you include a concise,
7177 but complete code example. Please try to boil your example down to
7178 just the essential code needed to reproduce the problem, and include
7179 an exact recipe of steps needed to expose the bug. Be especially sure
7180 to include any code that appears @emph{before} your bug example, if
7181 you think it might affect our ability to reproduce it.
7182
7183 Please try to produce the problem in an Emacs instance without any
7184 customizations loaded (i.e., start it with the @samp{-q --no-site-file}
7185 arguments). If it works correctly there, the problem might be caused
7186 by faulty customizations in either your own or your site
7187 configuration. In that case, we'd appreciate it if you isolate the
7188 Emacs Lisp code that triggers the bug and include it in your report.
7189
7190 @cindex bug report mailing list
7191 Reporting a bug using @code{c-submit-bug-report} files it in
7192 the GNU Bug Tracker at @url{http://debbugs.gnu.org}, then sends it on
7193 to @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}. You can also send reports, other
7194 questions, and suggestions (kudos?@: @t{;-)} to that address. It's a
7195 mailing list which you can join or browse an archive of; see the web site at
7196 @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net/} for further details.
7197
7198 @cindex announcement mailing list
7199 If you want to get announcements of new @ccmode{} releases, send the
7200 word @emph{subscribe} in the body of a message to
7201 @email{cc-mode-announce-request@@lists.sourceforge.net}. It's possible
7202 to subscribe from the web site too. Announcements will also be posted
7203 to the Usenet newsgroups @code{gnu.emacs.sources}, @code{comp.emacs},
7204 @code{comp.emacs.xemacs}, @code{comp.lang.c}, @code{comp.lang.c++},
7205 @code{comp.lang.objective-c}, @code{comp.lang.java.softwaretools},
7206 @code{comp.lang.idl}, and @code{comp.lang.awk}.
7207 @c There is no newsgroup for Pike. :-(
7208
7209
7210 @node GNU Free Documentation License, Command and Function Index, Mailing Lists and Bug Reports, Top
7211 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7212 @include doclicense.texi
7213
7214
7215 @c Removed the tentative node "Mode Initialization" from here, 2005/8/27.
7216 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7217 @node Command and Function Index, Variable Index, GNU Free Documentation License, Top
7218 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7219 @unnumbered Command and Function Index
7220 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7221
7222 Since most @ccmode{} commands are prepended with the string
7223 @samp{c-}, each appears under its @code{c-@var{thing}} name and its
7224 @code{@var{thing} (c-)} name.
7225 @iftex
7226 @sp 2
7227 @end iftex
7228 @printindex fn
7229
7230
7231 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7232 @node Variable Index, Concept and Key Index, Command and Function Index, Top
7233 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7234 @unnumbered Variable Index
7235 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7236
7237 Since most @ccmode{} variables are prepended with the string
7238 @samp{c-}, each appears under its @code{c-@var{thing}} name and its
7239 @code{@var{thing} (c-)} name.
7240 @iftex
7241 @sp 2
7242 @end iftex
7243 @printindex vr
7244
7245
7246 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7247 @node Concept and Key Index, , Variable Index, Top
7248 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7249 @unnumbered Concept and Key Index
7250 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7251
7252 @printindex cp
7253
7254
7255 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7256 @comment Epilogue.
7257 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7258
7259 @bye